817494
86
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/280
Pagina verder
6J4012003DL
Inglés 6J4012003DL (07.12) (GT9)
IBIZA
Owners manual
IBIZA Inglés (07.12)
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com-
prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehículo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y
la técnica. Por esta razón, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basándose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente
Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la información en el momento de la realización de la
impresión. Salvo error u omisión, la información recogida en el presente manual es válida en la fecha de cierre de su edición.
No está permitida la reimpresión, la reproducción o la traducción, total o parcial, sin la autorización escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos según la ley sobre el “Copyright”. Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificación.
Este papel está fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
© SEAT S.A. - Reimpresión: 15.07.12
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself
with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replace-
ments.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the
vehicle.
Table of Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . 10
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belt tensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Steering column controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Audio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Audio + Telephone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Radio frequency remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Panoramic tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . 113
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . . . 113
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and power socket . . . 123
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher* 125
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Start-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Acoustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cruise speed* (Cruise control system) . . . . . . . . 159
Practical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Anti-lock brake system and traction control ABS 164
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Economical and environmentally friendly driving 171
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . 176
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3Table of Contents
Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . 186
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . 195
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . . 204
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle tools, spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tyre repair kit* (Tyre Mobility-System) . . . . . . . . . 224
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Single headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Double headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Changing the bulbs of AFS headlights . . . . . . . . 237
Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Changing the rear, side and interior light bulbs . 239
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Petrol engine 1.2 44 kW (60 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Petrol engine 1.2 51 kW (70 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 63 kW (85 PS) . . . . . . . . . . 256
Petrol engine/LPG 1.6 60 kW (81 PS) . . . . . . . . . 257
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS) . . . . . . . . . 259
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS) Start-Stop 260
Petrol engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Diesel engine 1.2 TDI CR 55 kW (75 PS) DPF
Start-Stop Ecomotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Diesel engine 1.2 TDI CR 55 kW (75 PS) DPF . . . . 264
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) DPF . . . . 265
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/
without DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS) DPF . 267
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4Table of Contents
5Manual structure
Manual structure
What you should know before reading this manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the ve-
hicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Due to the fact that this is a general manual for the IBIZA, some of the
equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included
in all types or variants of the model; they may be different or be modified
depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this should in
no way be interpreted as misleading advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual re-
fer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when oth-
erwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in cer-
tain versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or
are only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright sym-
bol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
Marks the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn
you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
®
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage
to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning envi-
ronmental protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
6Content
Content
This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organ-
ised way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong
to chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire manual is divided into five
large parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information about the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as
seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Operating instructions
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the vehicle interior, etc.
3. Practical Tips
Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical specifications
Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will
help you to quickly find the information you require.
7Safe driving
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
This manual contains important information about the operation of
the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of
the on-board documentation also contain further information that you
should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passen-
gers.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury in the event of acci-
dent.
Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury.
The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
Three-point seat belts
Belt tension limiter for the front and rear side seats
Belt tensioners for the front seats
Front airbags
Side airbags in the front seat backrests, with chest and head protection
ISOFIX anchor points for ISOFIX rear child seat system
Height-adjustable front head restraints
Rear-centre head restraints with in-use position and non-use position
Adjustable steering column
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in the event of an acci-
dent. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your
passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment proper-
ly.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so impor-
tant, how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
8Safe driving
you and your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the
safety equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you
and your passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before setting off
The driver is always responsible for the safety of the passen-
gers and the safe operation of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working
properly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
Secure all baggage. ⇒ page 16.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vision mirrors properly
according to your size.
Ensure that the passenger in the central rear seat always has
the head restraint in the correct position for use.
Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly ap-
plied seat belts ⇒ page 42.
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers al-
so to assume a proper sitting position. ⇒ page 10.
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to
fasten their seat belts properly. ⇒ page 18.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style
and the personal behaviour of all vehicle occupants.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road
⇒  , for this reason:
Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by pas-
sengers or telephone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medi-
cation, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
9Safe driving
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
10 Safe driving
Proper sitting position for occupants
Correct sitting position for driver
The correct sitting position for the driver is important for
safe and relaxed driving.
Fig. 1 The correct dis-
tance between driver and
steering wheel
Fig. 2 Correct head re-
straint position for driver
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ Fig. 1.
Move the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor
with your knees still slightly angled ⇒  .
Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the
same level as the top of your head ⇒ Fig. 2.
Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back
rests completely against it.
11Safe driving
Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 18.
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle un-
der control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat ⇒ page 113.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 1. If
distance is less than 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you prop-
erly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces
the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any
other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if
the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and
head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The
airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when
the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her
seat belt correctly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear,
the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web
or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Correct sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest pos-
sible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒  .
Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back
rests completely against it.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the
same level as the top of your head ⇒ page 13.
Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front pas-
senger seat.
Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 18.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circumstan-
ces ⇒ page 40.
Adjusting the front passenger seat ⇒ page 116.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
12 Safe driving
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm be-
tween your chest and the dash panel. If distance is less than 25 cm, the
airbag system may not protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving;
never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An in-
correct sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case
of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could
sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such as
sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the back-
rest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide op-
timal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front
passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incor-
rect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro-
tection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet on the footwells, have the rear central head restraint
positioned for use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must
consider the following:
Adjust the head restraint to the correct position ⇒ page 13.
Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.
Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 18.
Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take chil-
dren in the vehicle ⇒ page 42.
WARNING
If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro-
tection.
Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when seat backrests
are in an upright position and the vehicle occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an
upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat
belt increases.
13Safe driving
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Fig. 3 Correctly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ Fig. 3 and ⇒ Fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 114
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event
of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height
of the passenger.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
14 Safe driving
Rear head restraints
Fig. 5 Adjusting the rear
head restraints
The rear head restraints have 2 positions:
Raised position or position for use A ⇒ Fig. 5. In this position, the head
restraint is used normally, protecting the occupant of the rear seats, along
with the rear seat belts.
Rest position, not in use B ⇒ Fig. 5. This position improves the driver's
rear visibility.
To fit the head restraint in position for use A, pull on the edges with both
hands in the direction of the arrow. To place it in rest position B, lower the
head restraint.
WARNING
Whenever a passenger is seated on the rear central seat, the head re-
straint should be placed in the position for use A.
Note
Note the instructions on the head restraints adjustment.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to ve-
hicle occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially re-
duce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for all passengers, especially children.
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒  .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dan-
gerous for all vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like
to make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
Never stand in the vehicle.
Never stand on the seats.
Never kneel on the seats.
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
Never lean against the dash panel.
Never lie on the rear bench.
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
Never sit sideways.
Never lean out of a window.
15Safe driving
Never put your feet out of a window.
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
Do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell.
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
Do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to se-
vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who
has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and
maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passen-
gers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip ⇒ page 10,
Proper sitting position for occupants.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
16 Safe driving
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by ob-
jects or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial po-
sitions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely fas-
tened on the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
order to stop the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driv-
ing.
Never place objects on the driver footwell. An object could move into
the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driv-
ing or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake,
clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒  .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a speci-
alised dealership.
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious
injuries.
Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original
floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the ped-
als. Risk of accident.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured
in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could affect safety or
driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravi-
ty.
17Safe driving
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment.
Place the heavy objects first.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could
cause serious injuries.
Always put objects in the luggage compartment.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or even third parties. This increased
risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an in-
flating airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “mis-
siles”. Risk of fatal injury.
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident.
Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accord-
ingly, to avoid accidents.
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight.
If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driv-
ing characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, inju-
ries and damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the rear lid is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the
door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the
vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. All vehicle
occupants must have their seat belt fastened ⇒ page 18.
Note
Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
18 Seat belts
Seat belts
Brief introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this section you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
Before inserting the central rear seat belt into its catch, make sure
that the backrest is properly engaged in position by pulling on the belt.
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden
braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and all other
vehicle occupants must always wear the seat belts properly while the ve-
hicle is moving.
Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use
seat belts. Like all other vehicle occupants, these people can also sustain
severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat
is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front
seats and two rear seats.
WARNING
Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your ve-
hicle.
Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt
belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The control lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
Fasten your seat belt securely.
Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly be-
fore driving off.
Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's
height and weight.
19Seat belts
The control lamp in the instrument panel lights up1) if the driver or pas-
senger seat belt is not fastened1) when the ignition is switched on. More-
over, an audible warning1) is heard on exceeding 25 km/h (15 mph). This
acoustic signal stops when the seat belt is fastened.
The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
1) Depending on the model version
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
20 Seat belts
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
Fig. 6 Vehicle about to
hit a wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat
belts
Fig. 7 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat
belts
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving ⇒ Fig. 6, a certain amount of energy
known as kinetic energy is produced in the vehicle and its occupants.
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the
greater the weight, the more energy there is to be released in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the
speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example,
the kinetic energy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat
belts, all of the occupants' kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of
impact ⇒ Fig. 7.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (20 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting
on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater
speed these forces are even higher.
21Seat belts
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle.
In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehi-
cle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Fig. 8 A driver not wear-
ing a seat belt is thrown
forward violently
Fig. 9 The unbelted pas-
senger in the rear seat is
thrown forward violently,
hitting the driver wearing
a seat belt
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal colli-
sion, unbelted vehicle occupants are thrown forward and will make violent
contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is
in the way ⇒ Fig. 8.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags
provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the driver) must
wear seat belts properly at all times during the trip. This will reduce the risk
of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether an air-
bag is fitted for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as
they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interi-
or in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts
endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants ⇒ Fig. 9.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
22 Seat belts
Seat belt protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Fig. 10 A driver wearing
the seat belt properly is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting po-
sitions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an acci-
dent. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could
lead to severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the dan-
ger of being thrown from the vehicle.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the
ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle
and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also de-
signed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together,
all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the
risk of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a seri-
ous accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fas-
tened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in
which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle
occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are
not damaged.
23Seat belts
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe
injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be ach-
ieved only if you use them properly.
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town.
The other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all times,
otherwise they run the risk of being injured.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat
belt.
Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as
the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to pro-
tect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or
other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar instruments to al-
ter the position of the belt webbing.
WARNING (Continued)
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retrac-
tors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an
accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at reg-
ular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must
be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even
if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be
checked.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
24 Seat belts
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked in-
to position by a latch.
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ Fig. 11.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged
in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is
pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas
or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder
belt is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt ten-
sioners ⇒ page 27.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this,
the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is in-
creased.
If a vehicle occupant is incorrectly belted in, the seat belt cannot pro-
tect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause ex-
tremely severe injuries.
25Seat belts
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they
are properly positioned.
Fig. 12 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
The shoulder belt must be positioned around the middle of the shoul-
der. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso ⇒ Fig. 12.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across
the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis
⇒ Fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 22.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnan-
cy.
Fig. 14 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
26 Seat belts
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt
is properly positioned ⇒ page 25.
Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly.
Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest
and as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ Fig. 14.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒  .
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged
in the buckle.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 22.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Fig. 15 Remove latch
plate from buckle
Press the red button on the belt buckle ⇒ Fig. 15. The latch
plate is released and springs out ⇒  .
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the
trim is not damaged.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
27Seat belts
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal
injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs sub-
stantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or
fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially in-
creased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who
has assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for yourself and all passengers, especially children.
Therefore:
Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the
vehicle is moving ⇒  .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them for the whole journey.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of seat belts ⇒ page 22.
Seat belt tensioners*
Function of the seat belt tensioner
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats
are retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front seats are equipped with belt
tensioners. Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on,
lateral and rear collisions only if the seat belt is being worn. This retracts
and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only once.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of light frontal and side
collisions, if the vehicle overturns, or in situations where no large forces act
on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are famili-
ar with these regulations, which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in
the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and
install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt
may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
28 Seat belts
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics in-
crease the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to
trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt ten-
sioners or seat belts.
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be
repaired.
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal
and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must
be performed by a specialised workshop only.
The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and
must be changed if they have been activated.
29Airbag system
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sit-
ting position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please en-
sure the following before driving:
Always wear the seat belt properly
Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly.
Adjust the head restraint correctly ⇒ page 13.
Use an appropriate child restraint system to protect children in
your vehicle.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants as-
sume a correct sitting position while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause a vehicle occupant not wearing
a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In
this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting po-
sition can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted
can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up
to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side
while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub-
stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly.
Always adjust the front seats properly.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
30 Airbag system
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front pas-
senger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
The front passenger front airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated.
The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transpor-
ted in a rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
⇒ page 40. When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to
the age and size of each child.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the air-
bag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the
child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident in-
creases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.
WARNING (Continued)
An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child
seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the back-
rest.
If, under special circumstances, it is necessary to transport a child in
a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely es-
sential that you observe the following safety measures:
Deactivate the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 40, Deactivating
airbags*.
Child seats must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer
and absolutely observe all warnings
Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat completely backwards so that the greatest possible distance to
the front passenger airbag is ensured.
Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright po-
sition.
Control lamp for airbag and seat belt tensioner
This control lamp monitors the airbag and seat belt tension-
er system.
The control lamp monitors all airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehi-
cle, including control units and wiring connections.
31Airbag system
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly moni-
tored electronically. The control lamp will light up for a few seconds every
time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
The system must be checked when the control lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously.
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop.
If any of the airbags are disabled by a Technical Service, the warning lamp
lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off if there
is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot
properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag
system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered
correctly.
Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehi-
cle. If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed
and fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the air-
bag system may be damaged. In the event of an accident this could cause
the airbag to inflate incorrectly or not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle
disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are
used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The air-
bags may fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the sur-
face of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, and do
not obstruct or modify them in any way.
It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a
water-moistened cloth. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag mod-
ule surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface
to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become de-
tached and cause injuries.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel)
should be performed only by a specialised workshop. Specialised work-
shops have the necessary tools, repair information and qualified person-
nel.
We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
32 Airbag system
For the sake of the environment
The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through
an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.
33Airbag system
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 16 Driver airbag lo-
cated in steering wheel
Fig. 17 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 16 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ⇒ Fig. 17. Air-
bags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a se-
vere frontal collision ⇒ page 36, Safety notes on the front airbag system.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the air-
bags can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints
properly. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also
as a contribution to your own safety.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger
a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 30
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control
lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 30
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
34 Airbag system
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off
there is a minor frontal collision
there is a side collision
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if
the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, Proper sitting position for
occupants.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli-
sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of injuries to the head or
chest.
Fig. 18 Inflated front air-
bags
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front and side airbags may be triggered to-
gether.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and de-
ploy in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ Fig. 18. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
35Airbag system
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
Fig. 19 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags
are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the
driver and front passenger airbags are triggered ⇒ Fig. 19. The airbag cov-
ers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
36 Airbag system
Safety notes on the front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed, the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle
occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head re-
straints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occu-
pant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side
while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub-
stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate re-
straint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sus-
tain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 42,
Child safety.
The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags
must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
37Airbag system
Side airbags
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 20 Side airbag in
driver seat
The side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat
backrests ⇒ Fig. 20. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the
upper region of the backrests.
Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat oc-
cupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision ⇒ page 38, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers
on the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat
belts also hold the passengers on the front seats in a position where the
side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing
their seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts
at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but
also as a contribution to your own safety.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off
there is a minor side collision
there is a frontal collision
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over
The main parts of the airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front seats,
a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 30
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control
lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched
on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been cor-
rectly closed.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
38 Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised
specialised workshop.
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if
the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, Proper sitting position for
occupants.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a side colli-
sion, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury
in a side impact collision.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle.
In certain types of accident the front and side airbags may be triggered to-
gether.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury
if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in
the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children
or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to
attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would im-
pair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing.
Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon
the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case,
the side airbags would not be triggered.
39Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats
with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your
vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the
use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of
the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised
workshop.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose
themselves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger
seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have
critical consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 42,
Child safety.
Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults
may occur during the airbag system operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
To ensure the correct operation of the side and head airbags neither
the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting
loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not
work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a
specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
40 Airbag system
Deactivating airbags*
Front passenger front airbag deactivation
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger front airbag must be de-activated.
Fig. 21 In the glove com-
partment: switch for acti-
vating and deactivating
the front passenger air-
bag
Fig. 22 Control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console
When the front passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that
only the passenger front airbag is deactivated. All the other air-
bags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition switch in the key operated switch in the glove
compartment to the position OFF ⇒ Fig. 21.
Check that the control lamp “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ” in the
dash panel ⇒ Fig. 22 remains lit ⇒  when the ignition is
switched on.
Activating the front passenger front airbag
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition key in the key-operated switch in the glove
compartment to the position ON ⇒ Fig. 21.
Check that the control lamp “PASSENGERS AIRBAG OFF” in
the dash panel does ⇒ Fig. 22 not light up when the ignition is
switched on ⇒  .
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
You should only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when, in
exceptional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat ⇒ page 42, Child safety.
41Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Other-
wise, there is a risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is nec-
essary to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passen-
ger seat, you must always disable the front passenger front airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger front airbag again.
Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is
off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause
the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.
When the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, if the control
lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger
airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised
workshop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front pas-
senger front airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a
fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or
fatal injuries.
It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy
in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
42 Child safety
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel
on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-
elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or be-
hind the front passenger seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children ⇒ page 20, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children
are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Original Ac-
cessories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke1).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying
with the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note
⇒ page 42, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of in-
jury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
Protect your children by properly using the appropriate child
seats ⇒ page 44.
Always ensure that the seat belt is properly positioned accord-
ing to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
seat.
When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traf-
fic.
Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least ev-
ery two hours.
1) Not for all countries
43Child safety
WARNING
Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of
potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep-
tional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 40, Deactivating
airbags*. If the front passenger seat has a height adjustment option,
move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate
the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper
sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potential-
ly fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being prop-
erly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an acci-
dent, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.
If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is
moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly impor-
tant if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag
system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehi-
cle.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or
cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
WARNING (Continued)
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal
seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdomi-
nal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on
any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor colli-
sion or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt is
properly positioned ⇒ page 24, Seat belts.
Only one child may occupy a child seat ⇒ page 44, Child seats.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
44 Child safety
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 stand-
ard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test num-
ber below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 23 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat
Group 0: For babies up to about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight, the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the figure ⇒ Fig. 23.
Group 0+: For babies up to about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight, the
most suitable seats are those appearing in the figure ⇒ Fig. 23.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒  in Safety notes on using child seats on page 43.
45Child safety
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 24 A category 1 for-
ward-facing child seat fit-
ted on the rear seat
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children
weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒  in Safety notes on using child seats on page 43.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 25 Forward-facing
child seat installed on
rear seat
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best pro-
tected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than
1.5 metres tall are best protected by child seats with head restraints togeth-
er with properly worn seat belts ⇒ Fig. 25.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
46 Child safety
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the cen-
tre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must
lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across
the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt
tight if necessary to take up any slack ⇒ page 24, Seat belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of child seats ⇒  in Safety notes on using child seats on page 43.
47Child safety
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and
on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be se-
cured, without fastening seat belts, with the ISOFIX securing rings
⇒ page 48.
Mass group
Seating position
Front passenger
seat
Rear side seat Rear central
seat
Group 0
to 10 kg
U* U U
Group 0+
to 13 kg
U* U U
Group I
9 to 18 kg
U* U U
Group II
15 to 25 kg
X U U
Group III
22 to 36 kg
X U U
Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this mass group.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as pos-
sible and always disable the airbag.
Seat position not suitable for children in this age group.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a re-
straint system suitable for age, weight and size.
Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could
cause fatal injuries to the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it is
necessary to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front pas-
senger airbag ⇒ page 40, Deactivating airbags* must always be disabled
and the seat adjusted to its highest position, where possible.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of child seats ⇒  in Safety notes on using child seats on page 43.
U:
*:
X
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
48 Child safety
Securing a child seat with the ISOFIX system
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats with the ISOFIX system.
Fig. 26 ISOFIX securing
rings
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow
the manufacturer's instructions.
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is
fitted with any other anti-rotation system, follow the manufac-
turer instructions carefully.
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the
rear floor. The access to the ISOFIX rings is between the rear seat backrest
and the seat cushioning.
Child seats with ISOFIX mountings are available in your Technical Services.
Mass group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Baby carrier F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
49Child safety
Mass group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU
B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU
A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in
this mass group
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this
mass group or size class
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed to only be used with ISOFIX child
seats.
Never secure child seats without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts or
objects to the fastening rings – this can result in potentially fatal injuries
to the child.
Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly to the ISOFIX anchor
points.
IU:
X:
Top Tether retainer straps
Some child restraint seats have a third Top Tether anchoring
point, apart from both “ISOFIX” anchoring points, which al-
low better child retention.
Fig. 27 Position of the
Top Tether rings on the
back of the rear seat
Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the
seat to the vehicle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat back-
rest.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
50 Child safety
The retainer strap is used to reduce forwards movements of the safety seat
in a crash, helping reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the
inside of the vehicle.
It is foreseen that an EU Directive will introduce requirements related to the
retention of child restraint systems by means of ISOFIX and Top Tether an-
chorages (probably compulsory for new types from 2010), which will entail
improved retention of the child restraint seat and less head movement in
case of frontal collisions.
Use of retainer straps on rear-facing seats
At present there are very few rear-facing child safety seats fitted with a re-
tainer strap. Please carefully read and follow the safety seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on how to install the retainer strap properly.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in
the event of a crash.
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment.
Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages
(ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).
Fitting the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point
Fig. 28 Retainer strap:
correct adjustment and
fitting
Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the anchor point situated
on the rear of the backrest
Pull out the fastening belt of the child restraint seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
Guide the Top Tether fastening belt under the rear seat head re-
straint ⇒ Fig. 28 (lift the head restraint where necessary).
Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of the child restraint
seat is correctly secured to the anchor on the back of the rear
seat.
Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following the child restraint
seat manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
Release the retainer strap in line with the instructions given by
the child safety seat manufacturer.
51Child safety
Push the lock and release it from the anchoring support.
WARNING
Read and bear in mind all the WARNINGS ⇒ page 49.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
52 Cockpit
Fig. 29 Dash panel
53Cockpit
Operating Instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the dash panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Light dimmer for instrument panel lighting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Air vents
Turn signal and dipped beam lever and cruise control sys-
tem* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 159
Instrument panel and warning lamps:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Horn (only works when the ignition is on)/ and driver
front airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Steering and starter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever* and opera-
tion of the multifunction display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 107, 59
Radio
Glove compartment/Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Switches for:
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cigarette lighter / Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Drink holder/Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Controls on the centre console:
- Start-Stop operation button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
- LPG gas system control button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
- Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
- Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
- Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dash panel switches:
- ESC OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 165
- Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
- Airbag disconnection warning lamp* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 40
Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Automatic*/manual gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 147
Storage space
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Steering column control lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Steering column controls for audio and telephone* . . . . . . . . . 76
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
54 Cockpit
Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Control for adjusting electric exterior mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Electric window controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model
versions or are optional extras.
25
26
27
55Cockpit
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Fig. 30 Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument
panel
The layout of the instruments depends upon the model and the engine.
Rev counter* ⇒ page 56
Digital display.
Speedometer ⇒ page 56
Menu selection button on the instrument panel digital display
Adjustment button depending on the selected menu
1
2
3
4
5
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
56 Cockpit
Rev counter
The rev counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone ⇒ Fig. 30 1 indicates the maximum engine speed
operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to change up into
a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the accelerator
before the needle reaches the red zone.
CAUTION
To prevent possible engine malfunctions, the rev counter needle should not
reach the red zone. The start of the red zone on the dial is different for some
engine versions.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up into higher gears sooner, following the recommended gear in-
dications ⇒ Fig. 33 will help you to reduce fuel consumption, emissions and
also engine noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equipped with a digital odometer and a trip recorder, in
addition to a service intervals display.
During the running-in period, the instructions shown on ⇒ page 168
should be followed.
LPG system*
LPG gauge
Fig. 31 Instrument pan-
el: gas gauge.
LPG system filler level display
The LPG tank ⇒  in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 52.8 litres at an
outside temperature of 15 °C ⇒ page 191, Refuelling with LPG.
The charge level can be checked on the analogue gas gauge located on the
instrument panel ⇒ Fig. 31. When the level reaches reserve, the gas reserve
warning lamp lights up and an audible warning is heard. Refill with LPG at
the earliest opportunity.
If, while driving in LPG mode, a sudden audible warning is heard and the
warning ERROR FUNC_ A GAS is displayed on the screen1), it means that
there is a fault in the LPG system. Take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to check the LPG system.
1) Depending on the model version
57Cockpit
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause se-
vere burns and other injury.
Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechani-
cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
The values shown in the average fuel consumption and distance to emp-
ty indications on the multifunction display (MFI)1) on the instrument panel2)
are approximate values only.
Two different consumption values are given on the MFI, depending on
whether the vehicle is running in GAS or Petrol mode.
Please check the fuel level on the fuel level gauge on the instrument
panel ⇒ page 57
If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside tem-
perature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on
LPG. Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
Digital instrument panel display
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Fig. 32 Fuel gauge
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 45 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone ⇒ Fig. 32, the warning lamp will
light and an audible warning will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At
this point there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
1) Optional equipment
2) Depending on the model version
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
58 Cockpit
Digital clock*
To set the hour, press button 4 ⇒ Fig. 30. The “hour” option
flashes on the digital display and is set using button 5 “set”
⇒ Fig. 30.
To set the minutes, press button 4 again and select the mi-
nute option. Set from button 5 “set”.
Once the operation has been carried out, the system memorises the time.
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature is displayed when the ignition is
switched on.
In addition to the outside temperature display, an ice crystal is displayed
and, if vehicle speed is over 10 km/h (6 mph), a warning tone is heard at
temperatures dropping from between +4 °C and -7 °C and at temperatures
rising from -5 °C up to +6 °C.
The lighting of the crystal symbol aims to warn the driver of the risk of ice,
so that he/she proceeds with due care.
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature
as a result of heat coming from the engine.
Recommended gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Fig. 33 Gear display
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are not in the correct gear, a triangle
will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should change
up or down ⇒ Fig. 33.
Note
The gear change indication should not be taken into account the accelera-
tion is required (for example when overtaking).
59Cockpit
Multifunction display (MFI)*
The multifunction display (MFI) shows you information on
the journey and fuel consumption.
Fig. 34 Window wiper
lever: button A and rocker
switch B
The multifunction system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Trip
memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
With the ignition switched on, briefly press button ⇒ Fig. 34 A
on the window wiper lever to move from one memory to anoth-
er.
Resetting a memory
Select the memory that you would like to reset.
Press and hold button A on the window wiper lever for at least
2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the mo-
ment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is con-
tinued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will be
added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-
neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km (miles) distance
travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named val-
ues is reached.
Information in the multifunction display (MFI)*
Fig. 35 Windscreen wip-
er and windscreen wash
lever: button A and rocker
switch B
You can switch between the following displays in the multifunction display
(MFI) by operating rocker switch ⇒ Fig. 35 B on the window wiper lever.
Memory displays
Driving speed
Journey duration
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
60 Cockpit
Average speed
Distance
Fuel range
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Outside temperature indicator
Speed warning
Km/h (mph) - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown in the display.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been
reached.
Ø km/h (mph) - Average speed
After turning on the ignition, the average speed will be shown after travel-
ling a distance of approximately 100 metres. Until then dashes will appear
in the display. The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle
is in motion.
km (miles) - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km (miles). The
memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Km (miles) - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current
fuel consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same
conditions as a reference.
Ø ltr/100km - Average fuel consumption
After turning on the ignition, average fuel consumption will be shown after
travelling approximately 100 metres. Until then dashes will appear in the
display. The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in
motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
l/100 km or l/h - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion ⇒ page 168.
Outside temperature indicator
The measurement range extends from -45 °C to +58 °C. At temperatures be-
low +4 °C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a “gong” warning sounds
if the vehicle is moving at more than 10 km/h (6 mph) (ice danger warning).
This symbol will flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the outside
temperature rises above +4 °C or does not rise above 6 °C when on the
move if it was already lit.
Set speed indicator
When the required speed has been reached, enter the “Speed warning”
mode menu and press button A -RESET-. The set speed is memorised. If
the indicated speed is exceeded at any time, a warning message is dis-
played on the screen and an audible warning sounds.1)
1) Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be repre-
sented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
61Cockpit
This may be deactivated by pressing the RESET button. The speed may be
altered using the rocker switch B in steps of 5 km/h (mph) within 5 sec-
onds of the initial memory value.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake sym-
bol” is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this
display - Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature
as a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Selector lever position display*
Fig. 36 Digital display:
Gearbox lever position
for automatic gearbox.
The position of the automatic selector lever is shown on the display
⇒ page 148.
Odometer
The upper counter in the display registers the total mileage covered by the
vehicle.
The lower counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates 100-
metre sections. The trip recorder counter may be reset by pressing the reset
button ⇒ Fig. 30 5.
Service interval display
Fig. 37 Service interval
display
The service indication is shown on the instrument panel display ⇒ Fig. 37.
SEAT distinguishes between services with engine oil change (e.g. Interval
service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. Inspection Service).
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
62 Cockpit
The service interval display only indicates the dates of services that include
engine oil change. The dates of all other services, such as Inspection Serv-
ice or brake fluid change, appear in the sticker on the door pillar or in the
Maintenance Programme.
Vehicles with service intervals dependent on time/distance travelled al-
ready have certain service intervals set.
The intervals are calculated separately in vehicles with LongLife service.
Technical progress has made it possible to considerably reduce servicing re-
quirements. With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures that your vehicle only
has an interval service when it is necessary. To calculate this (max. two
years), the conditions under which the vehicle is used and the individual
driving style are also taken into account. The service pre-warning will ap-
pear at 20 days or less prior to the corresponding service. The distance trav-
elled is rounded off to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time to full days.
The current service message can only be consulted 500 km (miles) or more
after the last service. Until that time, only dashes are displayed.
Service warning
A service warning will appear when the ignition is switched on if a service is
due soon.
The instrument panel display will show the “spanner symbol” and the
“km (miles)” indication, along with a clock symbol with the days remaining
until the date of the next service. The figure indicated is the maximum num-
ber of kilometres (miles) remaining before the date of the next service. The
indication changes after a few seconds. A “clock symbol” appears and the
number of days until the service appointment should be carried out.
Service
If a service is due, an audible warning will sound and the flashing “span-
ner” symbol will be shown along with the fixed text SERVICE.
If no service is carried out following the indication on the instrument panel,
the excess distance travelled and the excess time following the SERVICE
warning will be displayed.
Reading the service message
The current service message can be consulted with the ignition on, the en-
gine switched off and the vehicle at a standstill:
Press the button on the instrument panel as often as necessary until
the spanner symbol is displayed.
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or
day information.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not performed by a SEAT dealership, the display must be
reset as follows:
Switch the ignition off.
Press and hold the 0.0 / SET button.
Switch ignition back on.
Release the 0.0 / SET button and press the button within 20 seconds.
Do not reset the display between service intervals, as the display will other-
wise be incorrect.
If the display is reset manually, the next service interval will be indicated af-
ter 15 000 km (10 000 miles) or one year and will not be calculated individ-
ually.
Note
In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery is disconnected for a long period,
the days remaining until the next service cannot be calculated. Therefore,
the service message indications may be incorrect. In this case, bear in mind
the maximum service intervals permitted in the ⇒ Booklet Maintenance Pro-
gramme.
63Cockpit
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The control lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig. 38 Instrument panel warning and control lamps.
Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted
only on certain model versions or are optional extras.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
64 Cockpit
Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning
lamps
Further infor-
mation
1 Engine fault (petrol engine) ⇒ page 67
1Glow plug system for diesel engine
If lit: glow plug system active
If flashing: engine fault
⇒ page 68
2Soot accumulation in the diesel en-
gine particulate filter ⇒ page 68
3
Red:
Engine oil pressure
⇒ page 68
Yellow:
If flashing: engine oil sensor faulty
If it remains lit: insufficient engine
oil
4Bulb defective ⇒ page 69
5Level of liquid for washing windows
too low. ⇒ page 69
6Rear fog light switched on ⇒ page 69
7Seat belt warning lamp* ⇒ page 18
8Anti-lock brake system (ABS) * ⇒ page 69
9
If flashing: the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is working or the ASR
is working
If it remains lit: ESC or ASR faulty
⇒ page 70
⇒ page 70
10 Brake fluid required or
serious fault in brake system ⇒ page 71
11 Handbrake on ⇒ page 155
Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning
lamps
Further infor-
mation
12 Cruise speed activated (Cruise con-
trol) ⇒ page 71
13 Tyre pressure* ⇒ page 71
14 Selector lever lock (automatic gear-
box) ⇒ page 72
15 Fuel level / reserve ⇒ page 72
16 Doors open ⇒ page 72
17 Rear lid open ⇒ page 72
18 Airbag or belt tensioner system fault
or airbag disabled ⇒ page 30
19 Main beam switched on ⇒ page 73
20 Start-Stop system switched off ⇒ page 144
21 Electro-hydraulic steering ⇒ page 73
22 Fault in the emission control system ⇒ page 73
23 Coolant level / coolant temperature ⇒ page 73
24 Alternator fault ⇒ page 74
25 If it stays lit: ASR switched off ⇒ page 70
⇒ page 70
65Cockpit
Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning
lamps
Further infor-
mation
Turn signals in operation ⇒ page 74
SAFE Electronic immobiliser ⇒ page 74
⇒ page 80
WARNING
Failure to observe control lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injuries or damage to your vehicle.
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to pre-
vent danger to third parties.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings ⇒ page 195.
Note
The appropriate control lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate control lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Overview of indicator and warning lamps (vehicles with
LPG)
The control lamps indicate a number of different functions
and possible faults.
Fig. 39 Instrument panel control and warning lamps in vehicles with LPG.
Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps Further infor-
mation
1Green: LPG system connected ⇒ page 143
2Yellow: Gas reserve warning light ⇒ page 56
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
66 Cockpit
WARNING
Failure to observe control lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to pre-
vent danger to third parties.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the
bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or
other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings ⇒ page 195.
Note
The appropriate control lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate control lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning sym-
bols (priority 2)
Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will contin-
ue until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warn-
ing message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages (red)
Brake system symbol with the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID
INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Coolant symbol with the warning message STOP SEE COOLANT IN-
STRUCTION MANUAL.
Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning message STOP ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompa-
nied by one audible warning. Check the corresponding function as soon as
possible although the vehicle may be used without risk.
If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. Af-
ter a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be
shown as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
messages have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):1)
Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
1) Depending on the version of the model.
67Cockpit
Information messages displayed on the screen*
Messagea) Description
SERVICE The service interval has ended. Take the vehicle to a Techni-
cal Service.
IMMOBILIS-
ER
Immobiliser system active. The vehicle will not start. Take
the vehicle to a Technical Service.
ERROR Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehicle to a Technical Serv-
ice.
CLEAN AIR
FILTER Warning: Clean the air filter.
NO KEY Warning: Correct key cannot be found in the vehicle.
KEY BATTERY Warning: Key battery low. Change the battery.
CLUTCH Warning: Press the clutch to start. In vehicles with manual
gearbox and Start/Stop system.
--> P/N Warning: Place the selector level in position P/N to start.
Only in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
--> P Warning: Place the selector lever in position P to stop the
engine.
STARTING Warning: The engine starts automatically. Start-Stop system
activated.
START MAN-
UALLY
Warning: The engine must be started manually. Start-Stop
system activated.
ERROR
START STOP Warning: Start-Stop system error.
START-STOP
IMPOSSIBLE
Warning: Although the Start-Stop system is switched on, the
engine cannot be stopped automatically. Not all the neces-
sary conditions are met.
START-STOP
ACTIVE Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Vehicle in Stop mode.
SWITCH OFF Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Switch off the ignition
when you leave the vehicle.
STOP TRANS-
MISSION
TOO HOT
Warning: Stop the engine. Gearbox overheated.
BRAKE Warning: To start the engine, press the brake pedal. Only in
vehicles with automatic gearbox.
COASTING
FUNCTION
Warning: Coasting mode active. Transmission engaged. On-
ly in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
CHECK SAFE-
LOCK Notification of central locking function activated.
a) These messages may vary according the version of the vehicle model.
Engine management* 
This warning lamp monitors the engine management sys-
tem for petrol engines.
The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
68 Cockpit
Glow plug system/Engine fault*
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating the diesel engine. It flashes if there is an engine
fault.
Control lamp is lit
The control lamp lights up while the glow plug system is preheating.
When the warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight
away.
Control lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter*
If the lamp lights up you should help the filter clean itself by driving in
the appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth or fifth gear (automatic gear-
box: S gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h (40 mph), with the engine running
at approximately 2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is
burned. When cleaning is successful, the lamp turns off.
If the lamp does not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (particulate filter
, emission control system fault and glow plugs ), take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop to repair the fault.
WARNING
Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain
and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal ma-
noeuvres in surrounding traffic.
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temper-
atures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Otherwise there is a risk of fire.
Engine oil pressure
If this warning lamp is red it indicates that the engine oil
pressure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible
warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add
more oil ⇒ page 201.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. Do
not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.
Checking the oil level
If the warning lamp is yellow the engine oil level should be checked as
soon as possible. Top up the oil ⇒ page 201 at the next opportunity.
Oil level sensor faulty*
If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop to have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to
check the oil level every time you refuel.
69Cockpit
Bulb defect*
The indicator lights up when a bulb is not functioning.
The warning lamp lights up when there is a fault on the turn signals,
headlights, side lights and fog lights.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
⇒ page 204.
Rear fog light*
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . For
further information see ⇒ page 98.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*
A control lamp monitors the ABS.
The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automat-
ic test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The control lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
The control lamp does not go out again after a few seconds
The control lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further
information on the ABS go to ⇒ page 164.
If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the tyre pressure control lamp will
also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible
fault in the brake system ⇒  .
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 195, Working in the engine compartment.
If the brake system warning lamp should light up together with the
ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake
fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ page 208, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid lev-
el has dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of acci-
dent. Obtain technical assistance.
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may
have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the
rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to
break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assis-
tance.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
70 Cockpit
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped
with the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS control lamp . Take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further informa-
tion on the EDL see ⇒ page 166, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.
Traction control system (ASR)* /
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and . Both
warning lamps light up together when the ignition is switched on and
should turn off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the
function check.
The lamp has the following function:
It flashes when the ASR is working if the vehicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will re-
main lit. The warning lamp will also light up if a fault should occur in the
ABS because the ASR operates in conjunction with the ABS. For further in-
formation, see ⇒ page 163, Brakes
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the switch.
By pressing it again, the ASR function is reactivated and the warning lamp
switched off.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* /
There are two warning lamps for the Electronic stability con-
trol. The lamp provides information concerning the func-
tion and the provides information on the disconnection
status
Both warning lamps light up together when the ignition is switched on and
should turn off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the
function check.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and ASR. It also includes emergency
braking assistance (BAS).
The warning lamp has the following functions:
It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC is activated.
It will light up continuously if there is a fault in the ESC.
As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, it will also light up if a
fault should occur in the ABS.
If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESC.
In this case the ESC can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and
then on again. If the control lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the switch.
71Cockpit
Brake system*
This warning lamp lights up if the brake fluid level is too low
or if there is a fault in the system.
This warning lamp lights up if
the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 208.
there is a fault in the brake system.
This warning lamp can light up together with the ABS system warning lamp.
WARNING
If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driv-
ing, the brake fluid level ⇒ page 208, Brake fluid in the reservoir is too
low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain techni-
cal assistance.
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause
the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek tech-
nical assistance.
Cruise speed (Cruise control)*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched
on. For further information on the cruise control system, see ⇒ page 159.
Tyre pressure*
Fig. 40 Centre console:
tyre monitor system but-
ton
The tyre control lamp1) compares wheel revolutions and with it, the wheel
diameter of each wheel using the ESC. If the diameter of a wheel changes,
the tyre control lamp lights up. The wheel diameter changes when:
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
The tyre structure is damaged.
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving
with a trailer or on extreme slopes).
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
The wheel on one axle is changed.
1) Depending on the model version
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
72 Cockpit
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels,
the button ⇒ Fig. 40 must be kept pressed while the ignition is on until an
audible warning is heard.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre moni-
tor system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure control lamp lights up
If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the value set by the driver,
then the tyre pressure control lamp ⇒  will light up.
WARNING
When the tyre pressure control lamp lights up, reduce speed immedi-
ately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For
this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
Under certain circumstances (for example, when driving in a sports-
like manner, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp
may light up or function incorrectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after
turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Speed selector lever lock*
The brake pedal must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This
is necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Fuel level/reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is under
the reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Moreover, an audi-
ble warning* is heard. It reminds you to fuel up the fuel tank as soon as
possible ⇒ page 189.
Indicates that the doors are open*
This warning lamp lights up if one of the doors or the rear
lid is open.
The warning light should go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
Rear lid open*
The warning lamp should switch off when the rear lid is fully closed.
73Cockpit
Main beam headlights
This control lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the
headlight flasher is operating.
For further information see ⇒ page 104.
Electro-hydraulic steering*
The level of steering assistance depends on the vehicle speed and on the
steering wheel turning speed.
The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.
There is a fault in the electro-hydraulic steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. Take the vehicle to the
Technical Service as soon as possible.
Note
When towing the vehicle with the engine stopped or due to a fault in the
power steering, this will not operate. The vehicle can still be steered, but it
will require greater force to turn the steering wheel.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Control lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the
engine checked.
Control lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
Coolant level*/temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, and
three acoustic warning signals ⇒  are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant tempera-
ture is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunc-
tion of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if
necessary ⇒ page 226.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
74 Cockpit
If the control lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact a Technical Service or a spe-
cialised workshop.
Coolant level too low
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
wait for it to cool down First check the coolant level. If the level of the cool-
ant is below the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant liquid ⇒  .
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobilised for technical reasons, move it to a safe
distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and
place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escap-
ing from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any
work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to
cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings ⇒ page 195.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should
go out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest special-
ised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessa-
ry because this will drain the battery.
If the indicator flashes the voltage is insufficient for normal vehicle opera-
tion.
Turn signals
The control lamp flashes when the turn signals are in opera-
tion.
Depending on which turn signal is operating, either the left or right
turn signal lamp flashes. Both control lamps will flash at the same time
when the hazard warning lights are switched on.
If any of both turn signals fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice
faster than normal.
For further information on the turn signals, please see ⇒ page 104.
“Safe” Electronic immobiliser*
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser au-
tomatically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The electronic immo-
biliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out
of the ignition lock.
The instrument panel displays the following message1): SAFE. The vehicle
cannot be started in this case
1) Depending on the version of the model.
75Cockpit
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note
The vehicle cannot operate properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT key.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
76 Steering column controls*
Steering column controls*
General information
The column incorporates multifunctional modules from which to control au-
dio and telephone functions on the vehicle.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
Audio version+ Telephone version, to control the available audio func-
tions and the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions can be used to control the Audio system (Radio, Audio CD,
MP3 CD, iPod1) /USB1)).
1) If fitted in the vehicle.
77Steering column controls*
Audio Control
Fig. 41 Audio controls
Button Short press
Radio CD Audio CD MP3 AUX-IN
AVolume up
BVolume down
CCycle through source FM - AM - CD - FM...
DStation search. Higher frequency
.Next track No function
DStation search. Lower frequency
Previous track No function
ENext preset No function Change folder (forward) No function
FPrevious preset No function Change folder (back) No function
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
78 Steering column controls*
Audio + Telephone Control
Fig. 42 Audio + Tele-
phone Control
Button
Short press Long press
Radio CD
CD MP3/Micro
SD/Bluetooth
Audio
AUX-IN Radio CD
CD MP3/Micro
SD/Bluetooth
Audio
AUX-IN
AVolume up Continue volume up
BVolume down Continue volume down
CEnable voice recognition. Press to speak
With PID: No function specified No function specified
D
Station search.
Higher frequency
Next track No function
Station search.
Higher frequency
Next track No function
D
Station search.
Lower frequency
Previous track No function
Station search.
Lower frequency
Previous track No function
79Steering column controls*
EAccept call/hang upa) Reject call
With PID: No function specified
FCycle through source FM - AM - CD - Micro SD - Bluetooth Audio - FM ... Cycle through source FM - AM - CD - Micro SD - Bluetooth Audio - FM ...
a) With PID the button, E, performs more functions. Consult the specific PID Navigator manual.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
80 Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock
all doors by just pushing the button.
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it in the
opening direction. Depending on the vehicle version, either all doors will be
unlocked or only the driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be locked on
locking the vehicle using the key.
the interior central lock button ⇒ page 83.
the remote control, using the buttons on the key ⇒ page 86.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
Safe* security system
Selective unlocking system*
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
Emergency unlocking system
-
-
-
-
-
WARNING
Locking from the outside carelessly or without good visibility may
lead to bruising, particularly in the case of children.
When locking a vehicle, never leave children unaccompanied inside,
as from the outside it will be difficult to provide assistance if required.
Having the doors locked prevents an intrusion from getting in, for ex-
ample when stopped at a traffic light.
Note
For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safe security system*
This is an anti-theft device that consists of a double lock for
the door locks and a disabling function for the luggage
compartment in order to prevent a forced entry (depending
on country).
Activation
The “safe” system is activated when the vehicle is locked using the key or
the remote control.
To activate it with the key, rotate once it is inserted in the door lock cylinder
in the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button once
on the remote.
81Opening and closing
Once this system is activated, opening doors from the outside and the in-
side is not possible. The rear lid can not be opened. The central lock button
does not work.
When the ignition is switched off, the instrument panel display indicates
that the Safe system is on.
Deactivation
Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder twice towards the locking direc-
tion.
To activate the system using the remote control, press the lock button on
the remote twice in less than five seconds.
On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm volumetric sensor is also de-
activated.
With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be opened from the interior but not
from the exterior.
See “Selective unlocking system*”
“Safe” status
On the driver door, there is a visible warning lamp which shows the “Safe”
system status.
We will know that “Safe” system is activated by the flashing warning lamp.
The indicator will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted with an alarm,
until they unlock.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without an alarm: Warning lamp flashes continuous-
ly.
Safe deactivated without an alarm: The indicator remains off.
Safe deactivated with an alarm: The indicator remains off.
WARNING
No one should remain inside the vehicle if the “Safe” mechanism is acti-
vated because opening the doors will not be possible in case of emergen-
cy neither from the inside nor the outside. Danger of death. Passengers
could become trapped inside in case of emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows to unlock either just the driver door or all
the vehicle.
Driver door unlock button
Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote control.
Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder, rotate once in the unlock direc-
tion. The driver door will remain without “Safe” and unlocked. See Anti-theft
Alarm chapter for vehicles fitted with an alarm ⇒ page 88.
Using the remote control, press the unlock button on the remote once.
The Safe system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the driver door is un-
locked and both the alarm and the warning lamp are also turned off.
Unlocking all doors and the luggage compartment
The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that
all doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.
Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle, to
unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning lamp
and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
See ⇒ page 91.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
82 Opening and closing
Activating the selective unlocking system*
With the door open, insert a key into the start cylinder and start the ignition.
Insert the other key into the driver door lock and turn in the opening direc-
tion for at least 3 seconds. The turn signals will flash twice.
Deactivating the selective unlocking system*
With the door open, insert a key into the start cylinder and start the ignition.
Insert the other key into the driver door lock and turn in the locking direc-
tion for at least 3 seconds. The turn signals will flash once.
Involuntary unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unintentional un-
locking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and any of the doors (including the rear lid) are
opened within 30 seconds, it gets re-locked automatically.
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking
system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehi-
cle from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors lock automatically after exceeding 15km/h (10 mph). The rear lid
locks automatically after exceeding 6 km/h (4 mph).
If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors open, when starting again and
exceeding the mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.
Unlocking
On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle will returns to its status prior to
self-locking.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
Activating the system*
With the ignition on, press the locking key on the central locking system
within 3 to 10 seconds.
Deactivating the system*
With the ignition on, press the unlocking key on the central locking system
within 3 to 10 seconds.
In both cases, if the operation has been carried out correctly, the locking
lamp will flash ⇒ Fig. 43.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the
door would open.
Note
If the airbags are triggered during an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, ex-
cept for the luggage compartment. It is possible to lock the vehicle from in-
side with the central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on
again.
Emergency unlocking system
If the airbags are triggered during an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, ex-
cept for the luggage compartment. It is possible to lock the vehicle from
83Opening and closing
inside with the central locking, after turning the ignition off and back on
again.
Central lock button*
The central lock button allows you to lock and unlock the ve-
hicle from the inside.
Fig. 43 Central lock but-
ton
Locking the vehicle
Press button ⇒ Fig. 43 ⇒  .
Unlocking the doors
Press the button ⇒ Fig. 43.
The central lock button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the Safe security system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central lock but-
ton:
Locking the doors and rear lid prevents access from the outside (for
safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).
The driver door cannot be locked. This avoids the user from forgetting
his key inside the vehicle.
All doors can be locked separately from inside the vehicle. Do this by
pulling the door release lever once.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside it.
Repeated operation of central locking will prevent the central lock
button from working for a few seconds. Then, it can only be unlocked in
case it has been previously locked. After few seconds, the central locking
becomes operative again.
The central lock button is not operative when the vehicle is locked
from the outside (with the remote control or the key).
Note
Vehicle locked, button.
Vehicle unlocked, button.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
84 Opening and closing
Childproof lock
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from
opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.
Fig. 44 Childproof lock
on the left hand side
door
This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and
locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated
and deactivated manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to acti-
vate the childproof lock.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, anticlockwise for the left hand side doors ⇒ Fig. 44
and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Deactivating the childproof lock
Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you
want to deactivate.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, anticlockwise for the right hand side doors and clock-
wise for the left hand side doors ⇒ Fig. 44.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the
outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting
the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
85Opening and closing
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a re-
mote control and a plastic key tab*.
Fig. 45 Set of keys
The set of keys may consists of the following, depending on the version of
your vehicle:
a remote control key ⇒ Fig. 45 A
a key without remote control B,
a plastic key tab* C.
or
two keys without remote control B
a plastic key tab* C.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, go to a Technical Service with your vehicle
identification number.
WARNING
An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of
emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their
own.
An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an
obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your
vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with
you when you leave the vehicle.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion.
Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible
to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting
and hitting the keys.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
86 Opening and closing
Radio frequency remote control*
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The radio frequency remote control key is used to lock and
unlock the vehicle from a distance.
Fig. 46 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
Fig. 47 Range of the ra-
dio frequency remote
control
Using the button ⇒ Fig. 46 (arrow) on the control, the key blade is released.
Unlocking the vehicle ⇒ Fig. 46 1.
Locking the vehicle ⇒ Fig. 46 2.
Unlocking the rear lid. Press button ⇒ Fig. 46 3 until all the turn signals
on the vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking button 3 is pressed,
you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
again.
Also, the battery indicator on the key ⇒ Fig. 47, will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the key.
The receiver is inside the vehicle. The maximum range depends on different
factors. The range is reduced as the batteries start to lose power.
87Opening and closing
WARNING
An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of
emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their
own.
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result
in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always
take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any
electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The
vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could com-
plicate the aid in case of emergency.
Note
The radio frequency remote control key functions only when you are
within range ⇒ Fig. 47.
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked by using the radio frequency
remote control, the remote control key will have to be re-synchronised. For
this, go to your Technical Service.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the bat-
tery must be replaced.
CAUTION
The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote
control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the
same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of at an appropriate waste facility or
through an authorised service, given that their components can affect the
environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door with the remote
control, it should be re-synchronised.
While the vehicle is open:
Press the button 2 ⇒ Fig. 46 on the remote control.
Then close the vehicle using the key bit within one minute.
While the vehicle is closed:
Press the button 1 ⇒ Fig. 46 on the remote control.
Then close the vehicle using the key bit within one minute.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with
the remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the ef-
fective range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key
will have to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available in your Technical Service, where
they must be matched to the locking system.
Up to five remote control keys can be used.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
88 Opening and closing
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning signals when your
vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the
vehicle. For this, either rotate the key in the locking position or press button
2 on the radio frequency remote control*. The system is immediately ac-
tivated and the turn signal light located on the driver door will flash along
with the turn signals, indicating that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the
protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is connected. If the door or
the bonnet are subsequently closed, they will be automatically included in
the protection areas of the vehicle and the turn signals will flash according-
ly when the doors close.
The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the
alarm.
The turn signal light will flash once on closing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are car-
ried out when the vehicle is locked:
Opening of vehicle with mechanical key without switching ignition on
within the next 15 seconds
Opening a door
Opening the bonnet
Opening the rear lid
Ignition switched on with a non-validated key.
Movements in the driving compartment (vehicles with a volume sensor)
Towing of the vehicle1)
Tilt angle (tow-away protection)1)
Undue manipulation of the alarm
Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 sec-
onds. This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening all the doors in manual mode
In vehicles without alarm, when opening the driver door manually all the
doors are opened.
How to switch the alarm off
To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the key in the opening direction,
open the door and switch the ignition on, or press the unlock button on
the remote control.
In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm system, you have 15 seconds
to insert the key in the ignition lock and activate the ignition if the vehicle is
opened using the driver door key.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. and the ignition will be blocked.
1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection
89Opening and closing
Note
After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the bat-
tery from exhausting if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of
time. The alarm system remains activated.
The alarm will trigger again if attempts are made to open another protec-
tion zone.
The alarm system can be activated or deactivated using the radio fre-
quency remote control ⇒ page 86.
Vehicle interior monitoring and tow-away protection
system*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm* which detects unauthorized vehicle entry by means
of ultrasound.
Activation
It is automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is acti-
vated.
Deactivation
Open the vehicle with the key, either mechanically1) or by press-
ing the button on the remote control.
Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric
sensor and tilt sensors will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
mains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection system are au-
tomatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.
The vehicle interior monitoring and tow-away protection sensor (tilt sensor)
are automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In
order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away
protection system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if
not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection system should
be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, their
movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is trans-
ported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.
False alarms
The interior monitoring only operates correctly if the vehicle is completely
closed. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
The following cases may cause a false alarm:
opened windows (partially or fully)
panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or completely).
movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items
hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
1) The time period from when the door is opened until the key is inserted in the contact
should not exceed 15 sec., otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
90 Opening and closing
Note
If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumet-
ric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions,
except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is
switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off.
If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be in-
dicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver door when the vehi-
cle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is acti-
vated.
The vibration of a mobile phone left inside the vehicle may cause the ve-
hicle interior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to move-
ments and shakes inside the vehicle.
If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm
will be activated. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system
will only be activated once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).
91Opening and closing
Rear lid
Unlocking and locking
The rear lid opening system operates electrically. It is activa-
ted by using the handle on the rear lid.
Fig. 48 Rear lid: opening
from the outside
Fig. 49 Detail of the in-
side of the rear lid: hand
grip
Opening the rear lid
Pull on the release lever and lift the rear lid ⇒ Fig. 48. The rear
lid will automatically open.
Closing the rear lid
Hold the rear lid by one of the two handles on the interior lining
and close it, pushing slightly.
The system may or may not operate depending on the situation of the vehi-
cle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
then the opening system is operative and the rear lid may be opened.
To change the locking / unlocking status, press the button or the button
1 ⇒ Fig. 46 on the remote control key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or
not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if the rear lid is
opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph).*
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
92 Opening and closing
WARNING
Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of accident or injury.
The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights
are lit. This may damage the tail lights
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the
rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex-
pectedly while driving.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have
fatal consequences. Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could
cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is
in the path of the rear lid.
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may
penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle
will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking
does not operate (for example, if the battery is flat)
Fig. 50 Rear lid: emer-
gency open
There is a groove in the luggage compartment allowing access to
the emergency opening mechanism.
Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage compartment
Insert the key in the groove and unlock the locking system, turn-
ing the key from right to left, as shown by the arrow ⇒ Fig. 50.
93Opening and closing
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically*
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by us-
ing the controls on the driver door. The other doors each
have a switch for their own window.
Fig. 51 Detail of the
driver door: controls for
the front and rear win-
dows
Opening and closing the windows
Press the button to open the window.
Pull button to close the window ⇒  .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
⇒  .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch *
Safety switch 3 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win-
dow buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to
do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make
sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. The misuse of the keys, for example, by
children, may result in serious injury and accident.
The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activa-
ted with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could be-
come an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation.
Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
5
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
94 Opening and closing
WARNING (Continued)
The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched
off and one of the front doors has been opened.
If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric win-
dows. Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an ob-
struction, the window will automatically open again ⇒ page 94. If this
happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempting to
close it again.
One-touch opening and closing*
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
Buttons ⇒ Fig. 51 1, 2, 4 and 5 have two positions for open-
ing windows and two for closing them. This makes it easier to open
and close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing
Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
The automatic open and close function will not work if the bat-
tery has been temporarily disconnected. The function can be re-
stored as follows:
Close the window as far as it will go by lifting and holding the
electric window switch.
Release the switch and then lift it again for one second. This
will re-enable the automatic function.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage, the window will open (or
close) until you release the button. If you push or lift the button briefly to
the second stage, the window will open (one-touch opening) or close (one-
touch closing) automatically. If you operate the button while the window is
opening or closing, it stops at this position.
The one-touch opening and closing function will not function once the igni-
tion has been switched off.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a mal-
function in the electric windows. Contact a specialised workshop.
Roll-back function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of injury when the
electric windows close.
If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately ⇒  .
Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again.
If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again
with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic closing will stop
working for 10 seconds.
95Opening and closing
If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point.
If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The window closes with
maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate
one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a mal-
function in the electric windows. Contact a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Always take the ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle, even
if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children
are never left alone inside the vehicle.
The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched
off and one of the front doors has been opened.
Closing the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear could
cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in
the path of a window.
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehi-
cle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergen-
cy.
The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the
body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock*
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed for the electric win-
dow risers to open/close; if you stop pressing the button, the
window raising/lowering function is stopped.
If the automatic raising is stopped and immediately after, the
opening button is kept pressed, the window risers will lower.
Once the windows are completely closed, the turn signals will
flash.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
96 Opening and closing
Panoramic tilting sunroof*
Opening and closing the panoramic/tilting sunroof
The panoramic/tilting sunroof is opened and closed by us-
ing the switch when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 52 Panoramic/tilt-
ing sunroof
Closing the panoramic/tilting sunroof
Press and hold button B ⇒ Fig. 52 ⇒  . The roof starts to
close until the button is released.
Opening the panoramic/tilting sunroof
Press and hold down button A. The roof starts opening until
the button is released.
Automatic closing of the panoramic/tilting sunroof
Press button B once only; the sunroof starts closing automati-
cally until it is completely closed.
Automatic opening of the panoramic/tilting sunroof
Press button A once only. The sunroof starts opening automat-
ically until it is completely open.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
Close the sunroof manually until it is completely closed. Re-
lease the button
Press the closing button again, keeping it pressed down, until a
complete opening and closing cycle has taken place.
Always close the panoramic/tilting sunroof fully if you park the vehicle or
leave it unattended ⇒  .
The tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after the ig-
nition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passen-
ger door are not opened.
Sun visor
The sun visor is opened and closed manually (independently of the panor-
amic/tilting sunroof).
WARNING
Incorrect use of the tilting sunroof can result in injury.
Never close the tilting sunroof without first checking that there are no
obstructions. Risk of serious injury to you or others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the tilting sunroof.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
97Opening and closing
WARNING (Continued)
tilting sunroof) with a risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the
remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an
emergency situation.
The tilting sunroof continues to function until one of the front doors is
opened and the key removed from the ignition.
Ensure that no object and/or end is between the glass and the sun-
roof when the one-touch opening/closing function is reset.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in the locking
position until the tilting sunroof is closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds.
The tilting sunroof closes.
Press the unlock button to interrupt the function.
Roll-back function of the panoramic/tilting sunroof*
The panoramic/tilting sunroof has a roll-back function which prevents larger
objects getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does
not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The tilting
sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
Operation in case of breakdown
In case of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manual-
ly.
Fig. 53 Emergency oper-
ation of the panoramic/
tilting sunroof
Remove the plastic cover by inserting a screwdriver into the rear
section.
Insert an Allen key (4 mm) into the opening as far as possible
and close the sunroof.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
98 Lights and visibility
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Fig. 54 Detailed view of
the dash panel: lights,
fog lights and rear fog
light switch
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch ⇒ Fig. 54 to position .
Switching on dipped beam headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the front fog lights*
Turn the switch from position or to the first stop and pull
it. The symbol in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with front fog lights)
Turn the lights control from position or to the second stop
and pull out ⇒  . A control lamp on the instrument panel lights
up.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with no front fog lights)
Turn the light control to the end from position or and pull
it. A control lamp on the instrument panel lights up.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights
are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that
other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head-
lights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side
lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.
If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition
lock, an audible warning sounds while the driver door remains open. This is
a reminder to switch the lights off.
99Lights and visibility
The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Automatic lighting*
Fig. 55 Automatic light-
ing
Activation
Rotate the switch to the position “Auto”, this indication will
light up.
Deactivation
Turn the light switch to 0.
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control is switched on, dipped beam headlights are
automatically switched on by a photosensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
example.
WARNING
Even if the automatic headlight control is switched on, the dipped
beam headlights will not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the dipped
beam must be switched on manually.
Note
For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is
removed from the ignition, the audible warning will only sound if the light
knob is in position or .
If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
The rain sensor switches on the dipped beam headlights when the wind-
screen wipers have been operating continuously for a few seconds and it
switches the lights off when the continuous or interval wipe is switched off
for some minutes.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
100 Lights and visibility
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Fig. 56 Dash panel: reg-
ulation for instrument
and switch lighting and
headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting 1
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments
and switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning
the thumb wheel ⇒ Fig. 56 1.
Vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an auto-
matic headlight range system.
The instrument lighting (some dials and needles), the centre console light-
ing and the lighting of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-
rated in the instrument panel.
The instrument lighting (needles) is switched on when the ignition is on and
the light is off. The instrument lighting is dimmed automatically as the day-
light starts to fade. It goes out completely when the ambient light level is
very low. This function is intended to remind the driver to switch on the dip-
ped beam headlights in good time when light conditions become poor.
Headlight range control 2
By using the electrical headlight range control, 2 you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it
is possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the
same time, by using the correct headlight settings, the driver has the best
possible lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down 2 from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) are equipped with dynamic
headlight range control. When you switch on the lights, their range regu-
lates itself according to the vehicle load.
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not have headlight range control.
Daytime driving lights*
Daytime driving lights light up automatically when the igni-
tion is switched on (only with AFS headlights)
Daylight driving lights switch off automatically when the side lights are
switched on.
Activating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever upwards (right
turn signal), press it backwards to flash position and hold in this position.
Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are activated and
can be switched on.
Switching daytime lights off (bi-xenon lamps)
Remove the key from the ignition, move the turn signal lever upwards (left
turn signal), press it backwards to flash position and hold in this position.
101Lights and visibility
Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are deactivated
and cannot be switched on.
Note
See legal requirements for each country.
Adaptive headlights* (for driving round bends)
When driving around bends, the headlights will light the
most important areas of the road.
Fig. 57 Cornering light-
ing using adaptive head-
lights
This cornering light gives better illumination of the side of the road and the
corner area. The dynamic lighting is controlled automatically according to
speed and the steering wheel angle.
The two main headlights move at different angles to avoid that the front of
the vehicle is left completely in the dark.
Note
The system operates from a speed of about 10 km/h (6 mph).
Fog lights with cornering function*
This is an additional light source to dipped beam headlights
to light up the road as a bend is taken.
The cornering light operates with the lights switched on and when driving at
less than 40 Km/h (25 mph). They light up when the steering wheel is
turned or the flashers are operated.
Forward gear
If the steering wheel is turned to the right, or the right-hand turn signal
operated, the right-hand headlight lights up.
If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or the left-hand flasher operat-
ed, the left-hand headlight lights up.
In reverse gear both headlights light up.
Note
When the fog lamps are on, the cornering function is activated and both
headlights are continuously on.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
102 Lights and visibility
Coming/leaving Home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The Leav-
ing Home function is controlled with a photosensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to
provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver door is opened, the Coming
Home lighting comes on. If the driver door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the rear lid is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching
off the lights after all the vehicle doors and the rear lid have been closed.
If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the rear lid remain
open.
If the light switch is turned to position .
If the ignition is switched on.
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
the light control is in position  and
the photosensor detects “darkness”.
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlights has ended
If the vehicle is locked again.
If the light switch is turned to position .
If the ignition is switched on.
Note
To activate the coming/leaving home function, the rotary light switch
must be in position  and the light sensor must detect darkness.
If the ignition key is removed while the lights are on, and the lights are
flashed briefly and the driver door opened, no audible warning is heard, as
when the Coming Home function is on, the lights are automatically switched
off after a period of time (except when the light switch is in position or
.
Heated rear window
Fig. 58 Centre console:
heated rear window
switch
The heated rear window only works when the engine is running. When it is
switched on, a lamp lights up on the switch.
After approx. 8 minutes, the heating device of the rear window switches off
automatically.
103Lights and visibility
For the sake of the environment
The heated rear window should be switched off as soon as the glass is dem-
isted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.
Note
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary discon-
nection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating
conditions are re-established.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
Fig. 59 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights ⇒  .
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear. On an automatic gear-
box, move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road
users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehi-
cle.
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for example:
reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
there is an emergency
your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal
lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard warning lights
also work when the ignition is switched off.
WARNING
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
104 Lights and visibility
Note
The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a
long time, even if the ignition is switched off.
The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rel-
evant statutory requirements.
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the park-
ing lights and the headlight flasher.
Fig. 60 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
Move the lever all the way up ⇒ Fig. 60 1 to indicate right, and
all the way down 2 to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up 1 or down 2 to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding control lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
Turn the light switch to position .
Press the lever forward ⇒ Fig. 60 4 to switch on the main
beams.
Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flashers
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel 3 to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.
Move the turn signal lever up or down to turn the right or left-
hand parking lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
105Lights and visibility
Note
The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the instrument panel. The control
lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is de-
fective, the control lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal
bulbs are damaged, control lamp does not light up. Change the bulb.
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the instru-
ment panel.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the
instrument panel.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will on-
ly work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on,
an audible warning will be emitted while the driver door is open.
If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened.
This is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to
leave the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light
Fig. 61 Interior roof trim:
front interior lighting
The switch A ⇒ Fig. 61 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Sliding switch in central position The interior lighting is automatically
switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the igni-
tion. And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Move the knob to the position .
Interior light switched off O
Move the switch to position O ⇒ Fig. 61.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
106 Lights and visibility
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has been removed and
the courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
Front reading light*
Fig. 62 Front reading
light
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button B ⇒ Fig. 62 to switch on the reading light.
Switching the reading lights off
Press the corresponding button to switch the reading light off.
Luggage compartment light*
The light is activated when the rear lid is open, even when the ignition and
lights are turned off. For this reason, ensure that the rear lid is always
closed.
Glove compartment light
When opening the glove compartment on the passenger side, the glove
compartment light will automatically turn on and will turn off upon closure.
Visibility
Sun visors
Fig. 63 Sun visor on the
driver side
107Lights and visibility
The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of
their central supports and turned towards the doors in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 63. Never pull them downwards.
The driver sun visor has compartments for cards, and the passenger sun vi-
sor has a vanity mirror with a cover*.
Note
Incorrect use of the sun visors (e.g. pulling them downwards once they are
open) may result in broken hinges. This damage is not covered by the vehi-
cle warranty.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers
The window wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers and
the automatic wash and wipe.
Fig. 64 Windscreen wip-
er and windscreen wash
lever
The window wiper lever ⇒ Fig. 64 has the following positions:
Switching off the windscreen wipers
Move the lever to position 0.
Interval wipe
Move the lever up to position 1.
Move the control A to the left or right to set the length of the
wipe intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the
right: short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set us-
ing switch A.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to position 2.
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to position 3.
Short wipe
Move the lever down to position 4 to give the windscreen a
short wipe.
Wash and wipe automatic system
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position 5, the
windscreen washer is activated.
Release the lever. The wipers-washers will keep running for ap-
proximately four seconds.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
108 Lights and visibility
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and safety levels while
driving.
In cold conditions, you should not use the wash/wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation sys-
tem. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the wind-
screen and obscure your view of the road.
Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 205.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wind-
screen wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you
could damage both the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note
The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
The heat output of the heated jets* is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will on-
ly work in interval/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on and the bonnet
closed.
When the interval wipe function is on, the intervals are directly propor-
tional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the
intervals.
If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen wiper in position 1 or 2, it
will automatically change to a lower speed. The set speed will be resumed
when the vehicle pulls away.
The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds
once the “automatic wipe/wash system” has been operated, provided the
vehicle is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three
seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work again, you have to turn the ignition
off and then on again.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Fig. 65 Windscreen wip-
er lever
Switching on the rain sensor
Move the windscreen wiper lever into position 1 ⇒ Fig. 65.
Move the control A to the left or right to set the sensitivity of
the rain sensor. Control to the right: highly sensitive. Control to
the left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the interval wipe function. You will have to switch
the rain sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. This is done by switch-
ing the interval wipe function off and back on.
109Lights and visibility
Note
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor. This
may cause sensor disruption or faults.
Rear window wiper
The window wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper and
the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Fig. 66 Windscreen wip-
er and windscreen wash
lever: rear window wiper
Switching on the interval wipe
Press the lever forwards to position 6 ⇒ Fig. 66. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
Pull the lever back from position 6 towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you
switch off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system
Press the lever fully forwards to position 7 ⇒ Fig. 66. The rear
wiper and washer operate at the same time. The windscreen
wash system will function as long as you hold the lever in this
position.
Release the lever. The washer system stops and the wipers con-
tinue until the end of the cycle.
Move the lever towards the steering wheel to switch off.
WARNING
A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
Always note the corresponding warnings on ⇒ page 205.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the
glass before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper
when the wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the
wiper blade and the wiper motor.
Note
The rear window wiper will only work when the ignition is switched on.
Depending on the version of the model, when you engage reverse gear
and with the headlight wiper activated, the lamps are wiped.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
110 Lights and visibility
Headlight washer*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the window wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds – provided the dipped beam headlights or
main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight washers will be activated every three cycles.
Rear view mirrors
Adjusting the rear view mirrors
Before beginning any journey, adjust the rear view mirrors for correct visibil-
ity.
Interior rear vision mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear vision mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the rear vision
mirror should be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-
dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and
off as desired.
Fig. 67 Automatic anti-
dazzle interior rear vision
mirror.
Switching off the anti-dazzle function
Press button A ⇒ Fig. 67. Control lamp B goes off.
111Lights and visibility
Switching on the anti-dazzle function
Press button A ⇒ Fig. 67. Control lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the rear vision mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will
darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-
dazzle function is cancelled if reverse gear is engaged.
Note
The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects pre-
venting light from reaching the interior rear vision mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Folding in the exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be folded in. For this, press the mir-
ror housing towards the vehicle.
Note
Before washing the vehicle with an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior
mirrors to avoid damage.
Electric exterior mirrors*
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob
in the driver door.
Fig. 68 Controls of exte-
rior mirrors
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ⇒ Fig. 68 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exterior mirror so that you
have a good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the exterior mirror so that you
have a good view to the rear of the vehicle ⇒  .
Heated exterior mirrors*
Press the demisting button ⇒ Fig. 58
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
112 Lights and visibility
The mirrors demist for some minutes to prevent draining the
battery.
If necessary, press the button again to repeat the function.
The exterior mirror heating is not activated with temperatures
above 20 °C.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
Turn the control ⇒ Fig. 68 to position to fold in the exterior
mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash. This will help prevent
damage.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
Turn the knob to position L or R to fold the exterior mirrors back
out ⇒  .
WARNING
Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the
objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these
mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing
lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehi-
cles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer nee-
ded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note
If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be ad-
justed by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be com-
pletely folded electrically. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror housing by
hand, as this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors is not active at speeds over
40 km/h (25 mph).
113Seats and storage compartments
Seats and storage compartments
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection of-
fered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat
is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways
to suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
a safe driving ⇒ page 7,
ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum pro-
tection ⇒ page 18.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they
may sustain critical injuries.
Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your ve-
hicle.
Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt
belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system ⇒ page 42, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to
body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide
you and your passengers with optimum protection.
WARNING (Continued)
Always keep your feet on the footwell when the vehicle is moving;
never rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This
is also applied to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you
to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident.
If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an in-
correct sitting position.
It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. Failure to respect
the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or
between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as
great as possible.
Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary. Otherwise, your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore, in-
jury. In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect
sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.
Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front passen-
ger seat. When installing a child seat, please observe the warnings de-
scribed in ⇒ page 42, Child safety.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
114 Seats and storage compartments
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Fig. 69 Front view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Fig. 70 Side view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Adjust the head restraint so that the top is at the same level as
the top of your head or as close as possible to the same level as
the top of your head, at least at eye level ⇒ Fig. 69 and
⇒ Fig. 70.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 115
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event
of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height
of the passenger.
115Seats and storage compartments
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Fig. 71 Adjusting and re-
moving the head re-
straints
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head re-
straint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head re-
straint downwards.
Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its
positions ⇒ page 14.
Removing the head restraint
Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Press the button ⇒ Fig. 71 (arrow).
Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restraint into the guides on the backrest.
Push head restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint to suit body size ⇒ page 13.
WARNING
Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there
is a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly
for height to achieve optimal protection.
Please observe the safety warnings in ⇒ page 114, Correct adjust-
ment of head restraints.
Note
To fit and remove the rear head restraints, gently tilt the seat backrest
forwards.
When fitting the head restraints again, insert the tubes as far as possi-
ble into the guides without pressing the button.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
116 Seats and storage compartments
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
Fig. 72 Front left seat
controls
1 Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Then release the grip 1 and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
2 Adjusting seat height
Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
3 Adjusting the backrest angle
Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
only when the vehicle is stationary.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger in case of
a sudden braking or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted to-
wards the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved
only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and
front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the
seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to
improper positioning of the belt web!
Exercise caution when securing the seat height into forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted with-
out due care and attention.
To move the seat lengthways, pull upwards and not sideways on the
lever, as the force exerted on it in this position could damage it.
117Seats and storage compartments
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Fig. 73 Front seats heat-
ing switch
Press the corresponding switch ⇒ Fig. 73 to switch on the seat
heating.
Press once to connect the heating at a maximum force. Two
LEDs will light up ⇒ Fig. 73. After 15 min. of high intensity, the
upper LED goes out, the system is deactivated for 2 min. and is
then reactivated at low intensity (lower LED remains on perma-
nently).
Press the switch again to set the heating to minimum force.
(The lower LED lights up).
To disconnect the heating, press the switch again.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Note
The seats are only heated electrically when the engine is running.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
118 Seats and storage compartments
Rear seats
Folding down rear seats
Fig. 74 Folding up the
rear seat cushion
Fig. 75 Button for un-
locking the rear backrest
Folding seat down
Remove the head restraint ⇒ page 115.
Pull the front edge of the seat cushion ⇒ Fig. 74 1 upwards in
the direction of the arrow.
Lift the cushion 2 forwards in the direction of the arrow.
Pull the release button ⇒ Fig. 75 in the direction of the arrow
and fold the backrest forwards.
Insert the head restraints in the spaces on the rear of the seat
cushion which are visible when the seat cushion is lowered.
Folding seat forward
Remove the head restraints from the spaces in the seat cush-
ion.
Lift the backrest, before securing it, replace the head restraints
in the seat cushion, and then click the seat correctly onto the
locking rails.
Once the backrest is locked, pull on the central seat belt or di-
rectly on the backrest to check that the backrest has properly
engaged in position.
Check that the position lever is in neutral position.
Lower the cushion and push it backwards below the seat belt
buckles.
Press the front part of the cushion downwards.
119Seats and storage compartments
On split rear seats1) the backrest and cushion can be lowered and raised re-
spectively in two sections.
WARNING
Please be careful when folding back the backrest! Injuries can be
caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Do no trap or damage seat belts when raising the backrest.
After raising the backrest, check it has engaged properly in position.
Do this by pulling on the central seat belt or directly on the backrest and
check that the position lever is in the neutral position.
The three point automatic seat belt only works correctly when the
backrest of the central seat is correctly engaged.
1) Optional equipment
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
120 Seats and storage compartments
Storage compartment
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Fig. 76 Passenger side:
storage compartment
Fig. 77 Storage com-
partment for instruction
manual
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ⇒ Fig. 76.
This compartment can hold documents in A4 format, a water bottle of 1.5
L,...
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is
in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking
or by an accident.
Storage compartment on the driver side
There is a storage compartment on the driver side
Fig. 78 Driver side com-
partment
121Seats and storage compartments
Navigator mount on dash panel*
Your vehicle can be equipped with a portable navigator
mounting bracket.
Fig. 79 Mounting brack-
et for navigator on dash
panel.
Fig. 80 Bracket with
open cover for placing
the navigator.
It is necessary to use a specific adapter for each navigator, so consult your
Technical Service. This bracket supplies power to the portable navigator.
Storage compartment under front seats*
Fig. 81 Storage com-
partment under the front
passenger seat
To open
The compartment is opened by pulling on the lever and assist-
ing it with your hand.
To close
Press the cover inwards until the closed drawer clicks into posi-
tion.
Note
The storage drawer will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
122 Seats and storage compartments
Seat storage pocket*
Fig. 82 Seat storage
pocket
There is a storage pocket on the rear of the front seats.
Storage compartment in the front door panel*
In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bottle can be stored,...
Front drink holder*
Fig. 83 Front drink hold-
ers in the centre console
There are two cup holders in the centre console in front of the gearbox lever
⇒ Fig. 83.
WARNING
Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could
be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could
cause injury in the case of an accident.
When travelling the drink holder should always be closed to prevent
risk in the event of sudden breaking or accident.
123Seats and storage compartments
Rear drink holder*
Fig. 84 Drink holder in
the centre console
On the rear part of the centre console, behind the handbrake, there is a
drink holder* installed ⇒ Fig. 84.
This drink holder has a capacity of a bottle of up to 1 litre.
Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and power socket
Front ashtray*
Fig. 85 Front ashtray
Opening and closing the ashtray
To open the ashtray, lift the cover ⇒ Fig. 85.
To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ash-
tray and cause a fire.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
124 Seats and storage compartments
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 86 Lighter
Press on the cigarette lighter ⇒ Fig. 86 to activate it ⇒  .
Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glow-
ing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or
start a fire.
Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or negligence when using
the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is
running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone inside the ve-
hicle.
Power socket
Fig. 87 Front power
socket
The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can also be used for other electri-
cal components with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When the engine is
switched off, however, the vehicle battery will discharge. For further infor-
mation see ⇒ page 185.
WARNING
The power sockets and the connected accessories will only operate when
the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the
sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a
fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehi-
cle.
Note
The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in
⇒ page 185.
125Seats and storage compartments
Auxiliary audio input connection (AUX)*
Fig. 88 AUX connection
in the centre console (de-
pending on the equip-
ment)
Insert the plug as far as possible (see radio manual) ⇒ Fig. 88.
AUX/USB input connection*
Fig. 89 AUX/USB input
connection (depending
on the equipment)
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire
extinguisher*
First-aid kit, warning triangle and fire extinguisher
The use of reflective warning triangles is obligatory in emergencies in some
countries. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light bulbs.
The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are located in the luggage com-
partment, held in place by Velcro.
Note
The first aid kit, the warning triangles and the fire extinguisher are not
supplied with the vehicle as standard.
The first aid kit, the warning triangles and the fire extinguisher should
meet legal requirements.
The expiry date of the content of the first aid kit should be checked.
Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
Before purchasing accessories and spare parts, see the instructions in
⇒ page 185, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
126 Seats and storage compartments
Luggage compartment
Storing objects
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle may cause serious
injuries.
Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and
change the way the vehicle handles.
In case of sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the inte-
rior can be flung forward, injuring passengers.
Always put objects in the luggage compartment.
When you transport heavy objects, always take into account that a
change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle han-
dling.
Please observe information on safe driving ⇒ page 7, Safe driving.
CAUTION
Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the heated rear window and cause damage.
Note
The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered
as this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Rear shelf
Fig. 90 Rear shelf
Removing the shelf
Unhook the loops ⇒ Fig. 90 B from housings A.
Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest position and pull out-
wards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will
endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
127Seats and storage compartments
CAUTION
Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is
not correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged.
If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compart-
ment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Roof rack*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories supplied by SEAT
Official Services should be used.
It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the instal-
lation manual. Not following these instructions may damage the bodywork.
Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts
and check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts
and check them at regular intervals.
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted
for each roof rack system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly
along the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the en-
tire roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor
should the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the Technical Data
section.
When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an in-
creased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
For those vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sunroof*, ensure that it
does not interfere with the load on the roof rack system when opened.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
128 Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Heating
Controls
Fig. 91 Heating controls
on the dash panel
Using the controls A and C and with the switch B ⇒ Fig. 91
you can adjust the temperature, the air distribution and the
blower speed.
Press the button D to switch air recirculation mode on or off.
When the function is activated, a warning light on the button is
turned on.
Temperature
Switch A adjusts temperature. The required temperature inside the vehicle
cannot be lower than the ambient temperature. Maximum heat output,
which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the
engine has reached its operating temperature.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with switch B. The blower should al-
ways be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
Air distribution
Control C for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
– Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist. For safety
reasons, it is not recommended to switch air recirculation on.
– Air distribution to the upper body
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode D on (a lamp lights up in red) prevents strong
odours from the outside air from entering in the vehicle, for example when
passing through a tunnel or in a traffic jam ⇒  .
When the outside temperature is low, air recirculation mode improves heat-
ing performance by heating air from the interior instead of cold air from the
outside.
129Air conditioning
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered
with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please famili-
arise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation
system, including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehi-
cle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched
off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a
long time (risk of accident).
Note
Please consider the general notes ⇒ page 136.
Vehicle ventilation or heating
Fig. 92 Heating controls
on the dash panel
Ventilating the vehicle interior
Turn the temperature selector ⇒ Fig. 92 A anticlockwise.
Turn blower switch B to any of the head settings 1 -4.
Set the airflow to the desired direction using air distribution
control C.
Open the relevant air outlets.
Interior heating
Turn the temperature selector ⇒ Fig. 92 A clockwise to select
the desired temperature.
Turn blower switch B to any of the head settings 1 -4.
Set the airflow to the desired direction using air distribution
control C.
Open the relevant air outlets.
Defrosting the windscreen
Turn the temperature selector ⇒ Fig. 92 A clockwise to reach
the maximum temperature.
Turn the blower switch B to setting 4.
Turn air distribution control to .
Close outlet 3.
Open and turn outlet 4 towards side windows
Keeping the windscreen and the side windows demisted
Turn the temperature selector ⇒ Fig. 92 A to the heating area.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
130 Air conditioning
Turn blower switch B to any of the head settings 2 -3.
Turn air distribution control to .
Close outlets 3
Open and turn outlets 4 towards side windows.
Once the windows are demisted and as a preventive measure, the control
C can be set in position , thus obtaining greater comfort while prevent-
ing the windows from misting again.
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Note
Remember that the temperature of the engine coolant should be optimum
to ensure that the heating system functions correctly (except in vehicles fit-
ted with additional heating*).
Air outlets
Fig. 93 Air vents
131Air conditioning
Air distribution C
Switch on symbol Main air output through outlets:
1,2
5
1, 2, 5
- 3, 4
Outlets 3 and 4 can be closed or opened separately and the air flow di-
rected as required.
Air conditioning*
Controls
Fig. 94 Air conditioning
controls on the dash pan-
el
The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running
and the fan is switched on.
Using the controls ⇒ Fig. 94 A and C and with the switch B
you can adjust the temperature, the air distribution and the
blower speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button D
or E. When the function is activated, a red warning light on the
button is turned on.
To demist the windscreen:
Turn air distribution to .
Turn the fan control to one of the two levels depending on the
speed required.
Rotate the temperature control to the desired level of comfort.
Close outlets 3
Open and turn outlets 4 towards side windows.
Temperature selector ⇒ page 132
Blower control. There are four speed settings for the blower. At low
speed, it is recommended to set the blower to a minimum of 1 to im-
prove the intake of fresh air.
Air distribution control ⇒ page 132
Air recirculation button ⇒ page 133
AC button – Switch on air conditioning ⇒ page 132
A
B
C
D
E
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
132 Air conditioning
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with
snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise
yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system,
including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.
Note
Please consider the general notes.
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system
Fig. 95 Air conditioning
controls on the dash pan-
el
Interior heating
Disconnect the cooling system using button ⇒ Fig. 95 AC (the
button light turns off).
Turn the temperature selector A to set the desired temperature
inside the vehicle.
Turn the blower switch to any of the settings 1-4.
Set the air distribution control C to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
Connect the cooling system with button AC (the button light
should light up).
Turn the temperature control switch until the desired interior
temperature is reached.
Turn the blower switch to any of the settings 1-4.
Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration de-
sired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Coolant system
When the air conditioning is switched on, the temperature and the air hu-
midity go down. This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, the air condi-
tioning prevents the misting of the windows and therefore, comfort is im-
proved.
If the air conditioning does not work, this may be due to the following rea-
sons:
The engine is stationary.
The fan blower is switched off.
133Air conditioning
The outside temperature is below +3 °C.
The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because of an increased engine coolant temperature.
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a spe-
cialised workshop.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
When air recirculation mode is switched on (button ⇒ Fig. 95 with warn-
ing lamp) strong odours in the outside air do not enter the vehicle interior,
for example when passing through a tunnel or in a traffic jam.
When the outside temperature is low, air recirculation mode improves heat-
ing performance by heating air from the interior instead of cold air from the
outside.
When the outside temperature is high, air recirculation mode improves cool-
ing performance by cooling air from the interior instead of warm air from
outside.
For safety reasons, the air recirculation should not be switched on when the
air distribution control is set to the windscreen setting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioner is switched off, the windows can quickly
mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on
for a long time (risk of accident).
Note
When engaging reverse gear, the air recirculation is connected automat-
ically to prevent the entrance of exhaust gases in the vehicle on travelling
backwards. The control lamp on the button does not light up.
If the temperature control is turned to the coldest setting (blue point)
and the switch AC is activated, the “Air recirculation” function is automati-
cally activated in order to cool the vehicle rapidly using less energy; its
function control lamp will light.
If the function is not deactivated by pressing the button, this will deacti-
vate after approx. 20 min.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine
power and has influence on fuel consumption. Consider the following
points in order to have the system operating in the minimum possible time.
If the vehicle interior has overheated due to an excessive solar radiation,
it is best to open the windows or doors to allow the hot air to escape.
While in motion, the air conditioning should not be switched on if the
windows or the sunroof* are open.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
134 Air conditioning
Climatronic
Controls
Fig. 96 Climatronic controls on the dash panel
The air conditioner only works when the engine is running and the
blower is switched on.
Press keys 10 and 11 ⇒ Fig. 96 to adjust temperature.
The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When the function is activated, a symbol is displayed on the
screen. Press the button again to switch off the function.
Blower level indicator.
Air recirculation display:
Display AUTO (Automatic operation)
Demisting indicator
AC indicator (Cooling connected)
1
2
3
4
5
Interior temperature indicator selected
Air flow direction indicator
Fan speed increase
Fan speed decrease
Interior temperature increase
Interior temperature decrease
AUTO button – Automatic adjustment of temperature, ventilation and
air distribution
Button – Windscreen demisting function. The air drawn in is direc-
ted at the windscreen. The air recirculation mode will be switched off as
soon as the demisting function is switched on. At temperatures over
3 °C, the cooling system is switched on automatically in order to dry the
air.
Button – Air distribution to head area
Button – Air distribution to the upper body
Button – Air distribution to footwell
– Manual air recirculation
AC button – To switch on the air conditioning.
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with
snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise
yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system,
including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.
Note
Please consider the general notes.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
135Air conditioning
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature
is attained as quickly as possible, and then maintained.
Switching on automatic mode
Press the button AUTO . The indication ⇒ Fig. 96 3 is dis-
played.
Press keys 10 and 11 ⇒ Fig. 96 to adjust the desired tempera-
ture inside the vehicle. We recommend you adjust the tempera-
ture to 22 °C (72 °F).
A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of
22 °C (72 °F) is set in automatic mode. Therefore, we recommend you not to
change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences
or particular circumstances. The inside temperature can be set between
+18 °C (64 °F) and +29 °C (86 °F). If a lower or higher temperature is selec-
ted, LO or HI are respectively displayed on the screen. These are approxi-
mate temperatures which may slightly vary depending on the outside condi-
tions.
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature. To do so, it automatically
regulates the supplied air temperature, the blower speed and the air distri-
bution. The system also considers the sunlight radiation, so there is no
need for manual readjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost always
provides the best comfort for the vehicle occupants throughout the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for air distribution or blower. The temperature continues to self-reg-
ulate.
Manual mode
In manual mode the air temperature, flow, and the desired
air distribution can be adjusted.
Switching on manual mode
Press one of the buttons ⇒ Fig. 96 14 to 16 or press the blower
control 8 and 9 down. The indicator is switched off 3.
Temperature
The inside temperature can be set between +18 °C (64 °F) and +29 °C
(86 °F). These are approximate temperatures which may slightly vary de-
pending on the outside conditions.
If a temperature below 18 °C (64 °C), is selected, the display switches to LO
In this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the tempera-
ture is not regulated.
If a temperature above 29 °C (86 °F) is selected, the display switches to HI
In this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temper-
ature is not controlled.
Blower
The blower can be adjusted with buttons 8 and 9 ⇒ Fig. 96. If the blower
is off (level 1 is not shown on the screen) and button 9 is pressed after 1
second, the Climatronic switches off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air outlets separately.
Switching the air conditioning on and off
Pressing the button AC the air cooling system can be switched off in order
to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regulate. The set tempera-
ture can then only be reached if it is higher than the outside temperature.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
136 Air conditioning
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
Press the button to switch air recirculation mode on or off.
This is ON if the symbol ⇒ Fig. 96 is displayed on the screen.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from enter-
ing the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in a
traffic jam.
When the outside temperature is low, air recirculation mode improves heat-
ing performance by heating air from the interior instead of cold air from the
outside.
When the outside temperature is high, air recirculation mode improves cool-
ing performance by cooling air from the interior instead of warm air from
outside.
For safety reasons, the air recirculation should not be switched on when the
air distribution control is set to the windscreen setting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle
interior. If the air conditioner is switched off, the windows can quickly
mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on
for a long time (risk of accident).
Note
When engaging reverse gear, the air recirculation is connected automatical-
ly to prevent the entrance of exhaust gases in the vehicle on travelling back-
wards. In this case the symbol for air recirculation is not displayed.
General notes
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter)
serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air, including dust and
pollen.
For the air conditioner to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter
must be replaced at the specified intervals in the Maintenance Programme.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas reaching very
high pollution levels, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently
than stated in the Service Schedule.
CAUTION
If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with but-
ton AC to prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised
workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special
tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop.
Note
If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a pud-
dle underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need
to suspect a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
windows from misting over.
The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted
by slots designed for this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these slots with
items of clothing or other objects.
137Air conditioning
The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is excessive because of the sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by
opening the windows for a short time.
Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into
the air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
At low outside temperatures the compressor switches off automatically.
The AUTO button cannot be switched on either.
It is advisable to connect the air conditioning at least once a month, to
lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the
system.
To ensure correct operation, the grilles on both sides of the screen must
not be obstructed
When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a
moment.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
138 Driving
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely ad-
justed to suit the driver.
Fig. 97 Steering column
height adjustment
Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
Push the lever under the steering column ⇒ Fig. 97 down ⇒  .
Adjust the steering wheel until the correct position is set
⇒ Fig. 97.
Then push the lever up again firmly ⇒  .
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an in-
correct seating position can result in serious injury.
To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only
when the vehicle is stationary.
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of
at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest ⇒ Fig. 97. If
you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you.
Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a Technical Service. Here you will be hel-
ped to decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face,
the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident.
Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold
the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In
such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the
arms, hands and head.
139Driving
Safety
Electronic stability control (ESC)*
The ESC helps make driving safer in extreme driving condi-
tions.
Fig. 98 Detailed view of the dash panel: ESC switch.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains the electronic differential lock
(EDL) and the traction control system (ASR). The ESC works together with
the ABS. Both control lamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are faul-
ty.
The ESC system is started automatically when the engine is started.
The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. The ESC switch
only switches the ASR off.
WARNING
Do not forget that the Electronic stability control ESC cannot defy the
laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and
wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not
encourage you to run any risks.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESC in
⇒ page 163, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Fig. 99 Ignition key po-
sitions
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
140 Driving
Ignition switched off, steering lock 1
In this position ⇒ Fig. 99 the ignition and the engine are OFF and the steer-
ing may get locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the ignition key, turn the steering
wheel until it locks with an audible sound. You should always lock the steer-
ing wheel when you leave your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle theft
⇒  .
Switching the ignition or the glow plug system on 2
Turn the ignition key to this position and release it. If the key cannot be
turned or it is difficult to turn from position 1 to position 2, move the
steering wheel from one side to the other until it is released.
Starting 3
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position 1. The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle
comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately
blocked- Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disa-
bled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the
engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse-
quently resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical
system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position 3).
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons
from driving the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser au-
tomatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as
you pull the key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with its correct
code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
141Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key
with its correct code.
Move the gearbox lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the start-
er to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to the starting ⇒ page 139 position.
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the start-
er motor must not run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to slightly press down the ac-
celerator.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few sec-
onds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after 10 sec-
onds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start, the
fuel pump fuse should be checked ⇒ page 226, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The ex-
haust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poi-
sonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also result in death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
CAUTION
When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving
at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and fol-
low the instructions in ⇒ page 242, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle station-
ary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach oper-
ating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
142 Driving
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key
with its correct code.
Move the gearbox lever to the neutral position and depress the
clutch pedal thoroughly and hold it in this position for the start-
er to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to the starting position.
Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ Fig. 99 2. The warning lamp
will light for engine pre-heating.
When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition key to position 3 to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the start-
er motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few sec-
onds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see the ⇒ page 242.
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major
electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp goes out.
Starting the diesel engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because
the fuel system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The ex-
haust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poi-
sonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness. It can also result in death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
CAUTION
When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving
at full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and fol-
low the instructions in ⇒ page 242, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle station-
ary. You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the en-
gine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle.
Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ Fig. 99 1.
After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 mi-
nutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
143Driving
temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
ment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is completely stationary.
The brake servo works only when the engine is running. With the en-
gine switched off, more strength is needed to brake. As normal brake op-
eration cannot be performed, risk of accidents and serious injury may ex-
ist.
The steering lock can be immediately blocked once the key is re-
moved from the ignition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
When the engine has been running under a heavy load for a long period,
heat can accumulate in the engine compartment and cause engine damage.
For this reason, you should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you
switch it off.
Driving with LPG*
Fig. 100 Centre console:
gas system control
switch.
Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.
The LPG tank ⇒ page 191, Refuelling with LPG is in the spare wheel well
⇒  .
It is possible to change from LPG to petrol while the engine is running, even
if the vehicle is moving, by pressing the  button located on the centre
console ⇒ Fig. 100.
Starting the engine
The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used
when it was switched off.
Automatic switch from petrol to LPG
When the engine is turned on and the following conditions are met, the sys-
tem will automatically switch from petrol mode to LPG mode, the notifica-
tion changed to GAS mode is displayed and the green warning lamp on the
instrument panel lights up:
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
144 Driving
There is enough LPG in the tank.
The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30 °C.
Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
Automatic switch from LPG to petrol
When the vehicle is operating in LPG mode and one of these conditions is
met, the system automatically switches to petrol mode, the notification
changed to petrol mode is displayed and the green warning lamp on the in-
strument panel goes out:
When the engine is started.
If the LPG tank is empty.
If there is a fault in the LPG system.
At very low temperatures below minus 10 °C.
Manual switch from petrol to LPG
Press the  button on the centre console ⇒ Fig. 100 to change mode.
The notification changed to GAS mode is displayed. When the following con-
ditions are met, the system switches to LPG mode, the green warning lamp
on the instrument panel lights up and the notification displayed changes to
changed to GAS mode.
There is enough LPG in the tank.
The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30 °C.
Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
Manual switch from LPG to petrol
Press the  button on the centre console ⇒ Fig. 100 to change mode.
The green lamp on the instrument panel goes out and the notification
changed to petrol mode is displayed.
Running on petrol
Run the engine with petrol for short journeys at regular intervals to avoid
problems in the petrol system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause se-
vere burns and other injury.
Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechani-
cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside tem-
perature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on
LPG. Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
The notification LPG mode not possible may be displayed.
Start-Stop function*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine when the vehicle is stop-
ped and starts it automatically when required.
When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neutral and release the
clutch pedal. The engine will stop.
When the clutch pedal is pressed, the engine starts again.
The instrument panel display shows information about the sta-
tus of the Start-Stop function ⇒ Fig. 102.
145Driving
Start-Stop function conditions
The driver seat belt must be buckled.
The bonnet must be closed.
The engine must be at operating temperature.
The steering wheel must be straight.
The vehicle must be on flat ground.
The vehicle must not be in reverse.
A trailer must not be connected.
The temperature of the interior must be within the convenience limits
(AC button should be selected).
The windscreen de-mist function must be off.
If in an increase in airflow is not requested.
The temperature must not be set to HI or LO.
The driver door must be closed.
The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel
engines.
The battery charge must not be low for the next start.
The battery temperature must be between –1 °C and 55 °C.
Start-Stop function interruption
In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and
the engine will automatically start:
The vehicle starts moving.
The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.
The battery has been discharged excessively.
The Start-Stop System is manually deactivated.
The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.
The temperature of the interior exceeds the convenience limits ( AC but-
ton).
If the airflow is increased by more than 3 presses.
Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.
The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.
The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.
If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfil-
led.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You
could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and seri-
ous injury.
The brake servo does not work with the engine off. You need more
force to stop the vehicle.
Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is
why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving through water (fording
streams, etc.).
Note
For vehicles with the Start-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when
the engine is started, the clutch must be pressed.
When the conditions for the Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the in-
strument panel displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
If the steering wheel is turned more than 270°, it will not be possible to
start the vehicle again. To start the vehicle, straighten the steering wheel so
that it is turned less than 270°.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
146 Driving
Activating and deactivating the Start-Stop function
Fig. 101 The Start-Stop
function button.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is au-
tomatically switched on.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function
Press the ⇒ Fig. 101 button located on the centre console.
When the Start-Stop function is switched off, the warning lamp
comes on.
If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts im-
mediately.
Switching the Start-Stop function on manually
Press the ⇒ Fig. 101 button located on the centre console.
The warning lamp will switch off.
Driver messages
Fig. 102 Display on the instrument panel during Start-Stop function operation.
When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed
on the instrument panel.
If the Start-Stop system is not switched on, the lamp will appear on the
instrument panel.
Note
There are different versions of the dash panel; the display of indications on
the screen may differ.
147Driving
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Fig. 103 Centre Console:
gear shift pattern of a 5-
speed manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press
the clutch down thoroughly.
Place the gearbox lever into neutral and push the lever down-
wards.
Slide the gearbox lever to the left, and then into the reverse po-
sition shown on the lever.
Certain versions of the model may include a 6-speed manual gearbox, and
its diagram is shown on the gearbox lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
tion is on.
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as
a gear is engaged and the clutch released.
Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of
accident.
Note
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of
your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to
avoid unnecessary wear and damage.
Do not hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on hills. This causes premature
wear and damage to the clutch.
Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; although the pressure may
seem insignificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use
the foot rest when you do not need to change gear.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
148 Driving
Automatic gearbox*
Gearbox programmes
The automatic gearbox has got two gearbox programmes.
Fig. 104 Automatic gear-
box
Selecting the normal programme
Put the selector lever into position D.
Selecting the sport programme
Put the selector lever into position S.
If you select the normal programme, D, you will drive in the economy mode,
i.e. the programme is designed to reduce fuel consumption. The gearbox
changes up into a higher gear as soon as possible and down into a lower
gear as late as possible.
If you select the sport programme, S, you will drive in a sporty mode, i.e. a
programme in which shifts into high gears are postponed in order to use
the full power of the engine.
Selector lever lock
The selector lever lock in position P or N prevents gears from
being engaged inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle
to move.
Fig. 105 Automatic gear-
box
Fig. 106 Automatic
gearbox: Instrument
panel display
149Driving
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
Switch the ignition on.
Hold the brake pedal pressed down and at the same time, hold
the selector lever lock on the left of the selector lever also
pressed down.
The warning lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the brake ped-
al should be applied. This is essential when the selector lever is taken from
the P or N positions.
The selector lever lock only works if the vehicle is stationary or driving at
speeds up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At higher speeds the selector lever lock is
automatically unlocked in the N position.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible,
for instance, to “rock” the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in
snow or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake
pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about
1second.
Driving a car with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatically as the vehi-
cle moves.
Fig. 107 Automatic gear-
box
Starting
Start the engine with the selector lever in position P or N.
Driving
Press and hold the brake pedal.
By holding the lock button (button on the left in the selector lev-
er), select R, or D.
Release the lever and wait a little for the gearbox to engage the
gear (a slight movement can be felt).
Release the brake and press the accelerator ⇒  .
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
150 Driving
Stopping briefly
If stopping for a short time, keep the vehicle stationary by
pressing the foot brake hard to prevent the vehicle moving
backwards on a slope or “creeping” forwards, e.g. at traffic
lights. The selector lever does not need to be put into the posi-
tions P or N.
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking
Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
standstill ⇒  .
Apply the handbrake.
By pressing the lock button down, move the selector lever to P
and release the lock button.
Driving up and down hills
Press the selector lever from position “D” to the right into the
tiptronic selector gate.
Lightly press the selector lever back to change down.
Holding the car on a hill
The brake must be always pressed down to prevent the vehicle
from “rolling backwards” ⇒  . Do not try to prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards by increasing the engine speed while a
range of gears is selected.
Starting the vehicle up hills
Apply the handbrake.
With a selected gear, accelerate slowly and at the same time,
release the handbrake.
The steeper the slope, the lower the needed gear. This increases the brak-
ing effect of the engine. For example, when driving down a very steep slope
in third gear. If the engine brake effect is not enough, the vehicle will speed
up. The automatic gearbox automatically changes up to prevent the engine
over-revving. Use the foot brake to reduce speed and change into 3rd gear
using Tiptronic* ⇒  .
Your vehicle has an automatic interlock which prevents the selector lever
from being put into a position for driving forwards or in reverse from posi-
tions P or N if the brake pedal is not depressed.
The ignition key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is in position
P.
Control lamp “Pressing brake pedal”
When the warning lamp next to the selector lever lights up, press the brake
pedal. This is necessary when the automatic gearbox selector lever is
moved out of positions P or N. A text message or instructions to perform
necessary operations may appear on the instrument panel.
WARNING
As a driver, you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is run-
ning and a gear is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the
engine is running, you must apply the parking brake and put the selector
lever in position P.
If the engine is running and D or R are engaged, you will need to hold
vehicle stopped by depressing the brake pedal. The vehicle would keep
on creeping forward as the power transmission is not fully interrupted
even when the engine is idling.
151Driving
WARNING (Continued)
Never accelerate when moving the selector lever or you may cause an
accident.
Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Risk of accident!
Before driving down a long, steep slope, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change into a lower gear.
If you stop the vehicle up hill, always hold the foot brake strongly de-
pressed down to stop it from rolling back.
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often
or for long periods. Constant braking will cause the brakes to overheat
and will considerably reduce the brake effect. This increases the braking
distance and could cause the brake system to fail.
Never allow the vehicle to roll down a mountain or a slope with the
lever in the N or D position, regardless of whether the engine is running
or not.
CAUTION
If you stop the vehicle up hills, do not attempt to stop it from rolling
back by depressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. Other-
wise, the automatic gearbox may overheat causing damage. Pull the hand-
brake up or fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away.
If you allow the vehicle to roll when the engine is not running, or with
the selector lever in position N, a lack of lubrication in the automatic gear-
box will damage it.
Changing gear in tiptronic mode*
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to select gears man-
ually
Fig. 108 Changing gear
with tiptronic
Fig. 109 Steering wheel
with paddle levers for au-
tomatic gearbox
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
152 Driving
Changing gear in tiptronic mode
Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the tip-
tronic selector gate.
Lightly press the selector lever forward + to change up into high
gears.
Lightly press the selector lever backwards - to change down into
low gears.
Changing gear with the steering wheel paddle levers*
Press the right paddle lever + towards the steering wheel to
change up ⇒ Fig. 109.
Press the left paddle lever towards the steering wheel to
change down ⇒ Fig. 109.
Using the paddle levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driv-
ing mode regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox goes
into a higher gear a little before the engine reaches its maximum permitted
revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
will only change down when the engine cannot go over its maximum permit-
ted revolutions.
If tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox is in third gear and selector lever position
D, tiptronic mode will then also be in third gear.
Changing gears in the normal or sport programme using the steering wheel
paddle levers
If the paddle levers ⇒ Fig. 109 are used in the normal or sport programme,
the system switches temporarily to tiptronic mode. To exit “tiptronic” mode
again, press the right paddle lever + towards the steering wheel for approx-
imately one second. You will also leave tiptronic mode if the paddle levers
are not moved for a certain time.
Note
The gear paddle levers on the steering wheel can be operated with the
selector lever in any position and with the vehicle in motion.
Selector lever positions
The selector lever positions and gears are shown on the in-
strument panel display.
Fig. 110 Automatic
gearbox: Instrument
panel display
153Driving
Selector lever positions
The selected gear is displayed on the side of the selector lever and on the
instrument panel display. The currently selected gear for the automatic
gearbox will also be shown on the display.
Tiptronic gear indicator
If the automatic gearbox is shifted manually, the selected gears are shown
on the screen.
P - parking lock
When the selector lever is in this position, the driven wheels are locked me-
chanically.
Position P on the lever must only be selected if the vehicle is stationary.
To move selector lever from position P, the locking button on the selector
lever handle must be pressed and the brake pedal depressed at the same
time while the ignition is switched on.
To put the selector lever in position P, simply press the lock button down
and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal down.
R - Reverse gear
The reverse gear is engaged in this position.
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the
engine is idling.
To move the selector lever to position R, press the lock button down and, at
the same time, press the brake pedal down, with the ignition switched on.
With the selector lever in position R and the ignition switched on the follow-
ing occurs:
Reverse lights light up.
The air conditioner automatically changes the air recirculation mode.
The wiper starts if the windscreen washer is on.
The parking distance warning system* switches on.
N - Neutral (idling)
If this position is selected, the gearbox is in neutral. Power is not transmit-
ted to the wheels and the engine does not have a braking function.
Never use the N position to drive down a long hill. There is no engine brak-
ing and the brakes are subjected to excessive stain.
You could damage the automatic gearbox if you drive down hills with the
gearbox lever in position N and the engine switched off.
D - Drive (forward)
In this position the gearbox automatically changes to a lower or higher gear,
according to the engine's requirements, the driving style and speed. The
braking effect of the engine when driving downhill is very limited when the
selector is in this position. The instrument panel display shows the selected
gear as well as the selector lever in position D.
If position N has been selected and you wish to select D, you must press the
foot brake if the vehicle is stationary, or travelling at under 5 km/h (3 mph).
S - Standard driving position (Sport programme)
When the selector lever is in position S, it will automatically change up into
a higher gear later, and change down into a low gear, if compared with posi-
tion D. This way, it is possible to take full advantage of the engine reserve
power, depending on the engine demand, driving style and speed. The
braking effect of the engine when driving downhill is very limited. On the
instrument panel display the selected gear is shown as well as the selector
lever to position S.
To select gear range S, press the lock button on the selector lever.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
154 Driving
WARNING
If the vehicle moves with no control, an accident and serious injury may
occur.
As a driver, you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is run-
ning and a gear is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the
engine is running, you must always apply the handbrake and engage the
parking lock position P.
With the engine running and D or R engaged, you must hold the vehi-
cle stopped by pressing the brake pedal. Even while idling, the power
transmission is not fully interrupted and the vehicle could keep moving
forward.
Never accelerate when moving the selector lever or you may cause an
accident.
Never move the selector lever to “R” or “P” when driving. Risk of acci-
dent.
Before driving down a very steep slope, reduce your speed and shift
to first gear.
Always hold the vehicle on the foot brake if you stop on hills. Other-
wise, the vehicle could roll back.
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often
or for long periods. Constant braking will cause the brakes to overheat
and will considerably reduce the brake effect. This increases the braking
distance and could cause the brake system to fail.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is stationary. You could lose
control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and serious injury.
The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is
switched off.
WARNING (Continued)
The brake servo does not work with the engine off. You need more
force to stop the vehicle.
Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is
why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The
steering lock could suddenly engage, and you would not be able to steer
the vehicle.
Never allow the vehicle to roll downhill with the selector lever in “N”,
regardless of whether the engine is running or not.
CAUTION
If you allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off or with the
selector lever in position “N”, take your foot off the accelerator and wait un-
til the engine starts idling before returning to position “D”.
Kickdown feature
This feature allows maximum acceleration.
If you press the accelerator down thoroughly, the gearbox automatically
changes down, depending on speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to
take full advantage of give the vehicle maximum acceleration.
The gearbox does not change gear until the engine reaches the maximum
determined engine speed for the gear.
155Driving
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road
surfaces. Risk of serious injury.
Be particularly careful when using the kickdown features on slippery
road surfaces. With a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose traction
and skid.
You should use the kickdown feature only when traffic and weather
conditions allow it to be used safely.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehi-
cle from accidentally rolling away.
Fig. 111 Handbrake be-
tween the front seats
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly ⇒ Fig. 111.
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the di-
rection of the arrow ⇒ Fig. 111 and guide the handbrake lever
down fully ⇒  .
Always apply the handbrake as far as it will go in order to prevent yourself
from driving with the handbrake applied by mistake ⇒  .
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning lamp turns off when the hand-
brake is released.
WARNING
Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The
braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied
to the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
If the handbrake is only partially released, this will cause the rear
brakes to overheat, which can impair the function of the brake system
and could lead to an accident. This also causes premature wear on the
rear brake pads.
CAUTION
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
should also be selected.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
156 Driving
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
Apply the handbrake.
Select first gear.
Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn
the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Always take you keys with you when you leave the vehicle ⇒  .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
to roll.
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that
they point towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
point away from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and se-
lecting first gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehi-
cle unattended.
Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle occupants.
Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle
in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gearbox lever.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or
cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Hill-start aid*
This function is only included in vehicles with ESC.
This device helps when starting uphill.
These are the basic operation conditions: doors closed, brake pedal press-
ed down and vehicle in neutral. The system gets activated on engaging
gear.
After removing your foot from the brake pedal, the braking force is main-
tained for a few seconds to prevent the vehicle from moving backward when
putting into gear. This short space of time is enough to start the vehicle
with ease.
This system also works when reversing uphill.
157Driving
WARNING
If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off
the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain condi-
tions. Depress the brake pedal or use the handbrake immediately.
If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the handbrake im-
mediately.
When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal
down for a few seconds before starting off.
Note
The Official Service or a specialised workshop can tell you if your vehicle is
equipped with this system.
Acoustic parking aid system*
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system will use an audible warning to indi-
cate of the approach of any object towards the rear of the ve-
hicle.
Description
The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear
of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors loca-
ted on the rear bumper. The measuring range of the sensors starts approxi-
mately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of:
side of the rear bumper: 0.6 m
middle of the rear bumper: 1.6 m
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief audible
warning confirms the activation and correct function of the system.
Reverse gear
The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the
system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase rap-
idly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
After a distance lower than approximately 30 cm, a continuous signal
sounds (stop signal). The driver should not reverse any further.
Models with a factory-fitted towing bracket: When the vehicle is less than
0.35 m away from the obstacle the warning tone will sound continuously.
The driver should then not reverse any further.
The warning tone decreases by 30% after 3 seconds from the start of the
system.
Provided that it is not in continuous mode, the tone on the parking aid sys-
tem stops when it detects a wall parallel to the vehicle.
Trailer towing
For vehicles factory-fitted with a towing bar, the parking aid system will not
be activated by the engagement of the reverse gear when pulling a trailer,
as the trailer's electric connector will be plugged into the vehicle.
Possible faults
If a continuous beep sounds for some seconds when the reverse gear is en-
gaged, this indicates that there is a fault in the parking aid system.
If the fault continues until the ignition is turned off, the audible warning of
the fault will not be emitted every time the system is reactivated (by engag-
ing the reverse gear). Thus, the system ready indication will not sound ei-
ther. Have the fault repaired by a Technical Service as soon as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic warning signal, then the parking
aid loudspeaker is faulty and may not warn of obstacles.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
158 Driving
To ensure that the system works properly, the sensors must be kept clean
and free of ice and snow.
WARNING
The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles may not be detected.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system
will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to
avoid accidents.
The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
must take full responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres.
CAUTION
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin posts or trailer draw bars, high kerbs or painted railings etc)
may not always be detected by the system, so there is a risk of damaging
the vehicle in such cases.
In some cases, obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be de-
tected immediately by the system due to their geometry. Take special care
of this type of obstacle (corners, rectangular objects, etc.), as they can
cause damage to the vehicle.
Be especially careful when manoeuvring into a corner between two per-
pendicular walls. Carefully watch the approach of the wall to the side of the
vehicle (using the mirrors).
The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu-
vres.
External ultra-sonic sources (pneumatic drills, construction machinery,
other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system.
Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care not to damage or scratch
them. When cleaning with high pressure washers or steam cleaners, the
sensors should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance
of more than 10 cm.
159Driving
Cruise speed* (Cruise control system)
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed
in the range of 30 km/h (20 mph) to 180 km/h (110 mph).
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the ac-
celerator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible
to drive at constant speed.
Do not use the cruise control system when driving in dense traffic, on
roads with lots of bends or on roads with poor conditions (with ice, slip-
pery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as this could cause an accident.
Always switch the cruise control system off after using it in order to
avoid an involuntary use.
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current
road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending
downhill. The vehicle will accelerate due to its own weight. Use the foot
brake to slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Fig. 112 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
Switching on the cruise control system
Move the control ⇒ Fig. 112 A to the left to ON.
Switching off the cruise control system
Move the control A to the right to OFF or turn the ignition off
when the vehicle is stationary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator
on the instrument panel is lit.1)
If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off.
The system will also be deactivated completely when 1st gear is selected.*
1) Depending on the model version
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
160 Driving
Setting speed*
Fig. 113 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
Press the lower part SET of the rocker switch ⇒ Fig. 113 B once
briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held con-
stant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Fig. 114 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part RES of the rocker switch ⇒ Fig. 114 B to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part SET– of the rocker switch B to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as
long as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the
switch, the new speed is stored.
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal,
the system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the
case, however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (mph) higher than
161Driving
the stored speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stor-
ed again.
Cruise control is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake
pedal. Reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part of the rock-
er switch RES+ ⇒ Fig. 114 B.
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off cruise control temporarily*
Fig. 115 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
if the brake pedal is depressed,
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h (110 mph),
when the lever A is moved in the direction of OFF without fully being
engaged.
To resume cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the ve-
hicle speed to less than 180 km/h (110 mph) and press once on the upper
part of the rocker switch RES ⇒ Fig. 115 B.
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Completely switching off the system
Fig. 116 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er: switch and rocker
switch for the cruise con-
trol
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control A all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, igni-
tion off.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
162 Driving
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in
one of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and
the ignition turned off.
163Intelligent technology
Practical Tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It
works only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do
so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased consid-
erably when the brake servo is not active.
If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is be-
ing towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
than normal.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is only included in
vehicles with ESC.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
This is when the brake assist system comes into action. When pressing the
brake pedal rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emergency. It then very
quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
Automatic hazard warning lights activation
The brake lights flash automatically to indicate that the vehicle is braking
suddenly or in an emergency situation. If the emergency braking continues
until the vehicle comes to a standstill, the hazard warning lights will then
come on and the brake lights will remain on permanently from that moment.
The warning lights will automatically switch off when the vehicle begins to
move again or when the "warning" light button is pressed.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
164 Intelligent technology
WARNING
The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance to the vehicle in front, and when the road surface is slip-
pery or wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake
assist system.
The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! There-
fore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any
risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake system and traction control
ABS
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking dur-
ing braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake
pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one
or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has
intervened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully de-
pressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is re-
tained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 211.
If the running gear or brake system is modified, the effectiveness of
the ABS could be severely limited.
Traction control system (ASR)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating. The system al-
ways includes ABS
Description and operation of the traction control system during
acceleration (ASR
On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR system intervenes, reducing engine
power and preventing the driven wheels from slipping during acceleration.
The system works in the entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a
failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will also stop working.
165Intelligent technology
The ASR helps the car to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in
slippery conditions, where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossi-
ble.
The ASR automatically switches on when the engine is started. If necessary,
it may be turned on or off by briefly pushing the ESC button on the centre
console.
When the ASR is off, the warning lamp is lit. The ASR should normally be
left on. Only in exceptional circumstances, when the slipping of the wheels
is required, can they be disconnected using the ESC button, for example.
With compact temporary spare wheel.
When using the snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
The ASR should be switched on again as soon as possible.
WARNING
Remember that not even the ASR can defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ASR should not
encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
To ensure that the ASR works correctly, identical tyres should be fitted
on all four wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine,
brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may
affect the operation of the ABS and ASR.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
that is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner
wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the
inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This
causes an overall loss of lateral grip on the front axle, resulting in under-
steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS system can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and sig-
nals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess
driving torque of that wheel. This means that the driver's desired trajectory
is much more precise,
The XDS system works in combination with the ESC and is always active,
even when the ASR traction control is disconnected.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
General notes
The Electronic Stability Control increases the vehicle's stabil-
ity on the road.
The Electronic Stability Control helps reduce the danger of skidding.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) includes the systems ABS, EDL and
ASR
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
166 Intelligent technology
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for exam-
ple, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC brakes the appropriate wheel au-
tomatically.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
WARNING
Remember that not even the ESC can defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when
towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not
encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all four wheels must be fitted
with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine,
brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may
affect the operation of the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
⇒ page 164
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in
slippery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossi-
ble.
The system will control the revolutions of the driven wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
⇒ page 69.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h (50 mph), it is able to balance
out differences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm
caused by a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by
braking the wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving
force to the other driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL
cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will con-
tinue to function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not in-
formed that the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled
down.
167Intelligent technology
WARNING
When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and
snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may
start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into tak-
ing any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
CAUTION
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL ⇒ page 185.
Drive wheel traction control system ASR
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when
the vehicle is accelerating. ⇒ page 164
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
168 Driving and the environment
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first 1500 km (1000
miles).
Up to 1000 kilometres (600 miles)
Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900 miles)
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consump-
tion reduced.
Running in tyres and brake pads
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the first 500 km
(300 miles). New brake pads should be run-in carefully for
the first 200 km (120 miles).
During the first 200 km (120 miles), you can compensate for the reduced
braking effect by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. In case of a
sharp braking, the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than
with brake pads which have been run-in.
WARNING
At first, new tyres do not give maximum grip, and require running-in.
This may cause an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the first
500 km (300 miles).
New brake pads must be “run in” and do not have the correct friction
properties during the first 200 km (120 miles). However, the reduced
braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a
little harder.
Braking capacity and braking distance
The braking capacity and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The
rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions
under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you
often drive in town, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we
169Driving and the environment
recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by a
Technical Service more frequently than recommended in the Maintenance
Programme.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is
lessened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case
the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 200 km (120 miles). However, the reduced braking ca-
pacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little hard-
er. This also applies when the brake pads have to be changed further on.
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking power may be lower than normal.
On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat.
Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of
transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes “drag” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will
increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, va-
pour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
WARNING (Continued)
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to
the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories
please observe the relevant instructions ⇒ page 185, Technical modifi-
cations.
If a brake system circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased
considerably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid un-
necessary journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter
Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages
the catalytic converter.
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine
oil ⇒ page 201, Topping up engine oil .
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 242.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp
will light up when any of the described symptoms occur ⇒ page 63. If this
happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the en-
vironment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
170 Driving and the environment
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Risk of fire!
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or flammable materials under the vehicle.
Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-
tem. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry because the irregularity of the fuel
supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the
exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends
on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be
solved by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel particulate filter eliminates soot produced by
burning diesel.
Fig. 117 Vehicle data
sticker on back cover of
the Maintenance Pro-
gramme
Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel particulate filter) if the vehicle data
sticker (back cover of the “Maintenance Programme”) lists the PR code 7GG
or 7MG ⇒ Fig. 117.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the ex-
haust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If
driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multi-
ple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the diesel
engine particulate filter warning lamp will light up. This does not repre-
sent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not been able to
regenerate automatically and that you must carry out a cleaning cycle, as in-
dicated in ⇒ page 68.
171Driving and the environment
WARNING
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temper-
atures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not
come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of fire.
CAUTION
Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir-
cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the
diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will
not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce
the useful life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical Service will be
able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
Economical and environmentally friendly
driving
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an eco-
nomical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you
reduce pollution while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero (dis-
connection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible.
We recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
pears on the instrument panel ⇒ page 58.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly
at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at lev-
el crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after
only 30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart
the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear
and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up
phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine.
Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey,
you will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
172 Driving and the environment
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting exhaust gases, the
engine and the exhaust gas filtration systems should reach the optimum
service temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having
driven approximately four kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend
avoiding short trips whenever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If
the tyre pressure is just one bar too low, fuel consumption can increase by
as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by
up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will increase the fuel consumption, it is
advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no
unnecessary loads are being transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h (60-75 mph) your vehicle
will use about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused
by the roof rack even when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the
need for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, al-
ways turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples
of components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the
rear window heating or the seat heaters*.
Note
If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to switch this func-
tion off.
It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (40 mph)
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure
can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch
plate lining, causing a serious fault.
Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or
hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and
you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.
On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more
suitable for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes
will not suffer.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new SEAT.
Design measures for economical recycling
Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
Increased use of single-grade materials
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043,
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
Nearly all materials used can be recycled
Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
Recycled materials used in manufacture
173Driving and the environment
Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics
CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner
Compliance with prohibited materials regulation: cadmium, lead, mercury,
chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
Solvent-free cavity sealing
Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used in production
Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
Overall water consumption reduced
Heat recovery systems
The use of water-soluble paints
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol
is available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organ-
isations will have information about service station networks selling unlea-
ded fuel.
In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and
therefore spare parts are not available or the Technical Services can only
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary
maintenance and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the head-
light lenses. Further information is available at your Technical Service.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be
disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.
Trailer towing
What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the vehicle is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already
have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory require-
ments for towing a trailer. If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult
⇒ page 187.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
174 Driving and the environment
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any Technical Service.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up
to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspond-
ingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar
load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar loads that are given on the data
plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct
figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for
the towing bracket, are given in the vehicle documentation or in ⇒ chap-
ter Technical Data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them mov-
ing.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissible pressure shown on the stick-
er on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres
in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard rear vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you should have addi-
tional exterior mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the
rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
Note
Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the ve-
hicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage
compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and caus-
ing injury.
Note
By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
if it obscures the number plate.
175Driving and the environment
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed
in an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slight-
est sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can
be caused by locking of trailer wheels. Select a low gear in due course be-
fore going down a steep downhill. This enables you to use the engine brak-
ing to slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged slopes, driving in a low
gear and high engine speed, always monitor the coolant temperature gauge
⇒ page 53.
Electronic Stability Control*
The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
176 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This
may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in
the event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-
ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer
substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road
dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materi-
als remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive
effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have
the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car-care products are available in your Technical Services. Keep the product
instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
Car-care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be
kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil-
dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the pack-
age before using car-care products. Improper use could cause health
problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may pro-
duce noxious vapours; they should be used in well ventilated areas.
Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and ex-
plosion.
Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch
the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the
ignition.
CAUTION
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage
the paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with
plenty of water.
For the sake of the environment
When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the
ones which are not harmful to the environment.
The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordina-
ry household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
177Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washing tunnel
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork
wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the
brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such
as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from
that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake
discs and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by
braking several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness.
Risk of accident.
CAUTION
Before putting the vehicle through the car washing tunnel, do not tighten
the aerial if it is folded because it can be damaged.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
First soften the dirt and rinse it off with water.
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a
glove or a brush. Use very light pressure.
Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.
Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, using a different
sponge or glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
Dry the vehicle surface gently with a chamois leather.
In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals and their surfaces to
prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing the vehicle
After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
by braking several times.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
178 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
WARNING
Wash your vehicle with the ignition switched off.
Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of in-
jury.
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle
with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around
the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially pro-
vided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the
sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is
prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 179.
Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotating jets”) ⇒  .
After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. “Dry” the
brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 168.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (“rotating nozzle”). Even at
large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible
damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
Do not use water hotter than 60 °C. This could damage the vehicle.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This
is also important for bumpers painted in the colour of the bodywork. The
closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
179Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Vehicle paint maintenance
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water does not form small drops
and run off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax products are available at your Technical Service.
Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental
contaminants ⇒ page 176. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is
advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss can-
not be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased
in your Technical Service.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not con-
tain wax compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 179, Vehicle paint mainte-
nance.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning and care products.
CAUTION
The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle
may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning windows
Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol
based glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free
cloth.
Removing snow
Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mir-
rors.
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois leath-
ers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because
they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
180 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper,
push it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Tech-
nical Services. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-
screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits
are not removed.
CAUTION
Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of
the window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating ele-
ments on the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will
not freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.
181Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan-
ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to
the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 168, Braking ca-
pacity and braking distance.
Alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.
Every three months
Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road
salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be im-
paired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the
rims. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the dam-
aged area should be repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan-
ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to
the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 168, Braking ca-
pacity and braking distance.
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you
to check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Technical Service to carry out repair work
and additional anti-corrosion work.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
182 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehi-
cle is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the ve-
hicle, the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before
and after winter.
Your Technical Services have got the necessary workshop equipment to pro-
vide the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we rec-
ommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine
cleaned. On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams,
joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion
treatment.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 195.
Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the hand-
brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.
Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims
without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-
edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system may affect braking effec-
tiveness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and
sharp braking.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason, en-
gine washing should be carried out only by a specialised workshop or a pet-
rol station.
Vehicle interior maintenance
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning product.
183Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause inju-
ries.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be
cleaned with a special interior cleaner or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Cleaning the radio and climate controls
To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather maintenance
The leather should be treated twice a year with a special leath-
er-care product, available in your Technical Services.
Apply these products very sparingly.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this nat-
ural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides
employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
184 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after
the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be
protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in
high-quality natural leather are normal.
CAUTION
Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised
workshop.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belt cleaning
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow it to dry.
Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automat-
ic belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can im-
pair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of
the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialised work-
shop.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
CAUTION
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.
185Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult a SEAT dealership before purchasing acces-
sories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safe-
ty.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your vehicle, we recommend you to consult your SEAT Technical
Service.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories® and SEAT Ap-
proved Spare Parts®. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved.
For this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine
parts used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing
agency or are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the driv-
er's control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-con-
trolled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the Eu-
ropean Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to con-
trol the vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan), these
must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declara-
tion).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never
be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by
the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
nents, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
The SEAT Technical Service cannot be held liable for any damage caused by
modifications and/or work incorrectly performed.
For this reason, we recommend having all work performed by a SEAT Techni-
cal Service using SEAT Original Spare Parts®.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
186 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle
can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle can be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* roof aerial which
can be folded backwards, for example when going through an automatic car
wash.
To fold
Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and
then screw in again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
CAUTION
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
You will require an external aerial for mobile phones and
two-way radios.
SEAT has approved for your vehicle the use of mobile telephones and two-
way radios providing under the following conditions:
The correct installation of an external aerial,
transmitting power of maximum 10 watts.
The optimal reach of the equipment is only achieved with an external aerial.
First consult your Technical Service if you wish to use a mobile telephone or
a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a special-
ised workshop, for example a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of
injury if the airbag is triggered.
Using your mobile telephones or two-way radios in the vehicle with-
out an external aerial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could ex-
ceed authorised limits. This also may occur to external aerials that have
not been correctly installed.
CAUTION
Failure to consider the above-mentioned conditions could cause the elec-
tronics to malfunction. The most common causes of faults are:
no external aerial,
external aerial incorrectly installed,
transmitting power output in excess of 10 watts.
187Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone/two-
way radio.
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 118 Attachment points for towing bracket
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket A are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle
and including the maximum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
from 350 mm to 420 mm (fully loaded vehicle)
959 mm
438 mm
209 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact a Technical Service to check
whether your cooling system needs modification.
The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting
of a separate control lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicle electri-
cal system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.
Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.
If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is a serious danger
of accident.
For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
B
C
D
E
F
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
188 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
CAUTION
If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
Note
SEAT recommends that the towing hooks be fitted at a specialised work-
shop. In certain versions this may entail fitting a heat insulating plate,
which is why it is recommended that you go to a SEAT dealership. In the
event that the plate is not installed correctly, SEAT is exempt from any liabil-
ity.
Due to the specific design of the exhaust, the fitting of a conventional
towing hook is not recommended for some sportier versions. Please consult
your Technical Service.
189Checking and refilling levels
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 45 litres.
Fig. 119 Tank flap open
Opening the fuel tank cap
Lift the lid.
Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then insert the key into the
lock and rotate 180° to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise.
Closing the fuel tank cap
Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a
“click”.
Turn the key in the lock, without releasing the cap, clockwise
through 180°.
Remove the key and close the flap until it clicks into place. The
tank cap is secured with an anti-loss attachment
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the fuel tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this
will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are
warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of
the fuel tank flap.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
190 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
Never smoke or use an open flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion haz-
ard.
Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel can-
ister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and
leak.
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canis-
ter, please observe the following points:
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes
to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on
the ground to fill it.
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possi-
ble.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must
be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an
electrostatic charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
CAUTION
Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle
with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 sec-
onds without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may
take longer than normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing.
This is due to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before
starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched
off; this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
191Checking and refilling levels
LPG system*
Refuelling with LPG
The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol
filler neck.
Fig. 120 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter.
Fig. 121 LPG tank in
spare wheel well
Refuelling with LPG
Before refuelling, stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
Open the tank flap.
Before refuelling, please read the instructions on the pump.
Unscrew the cap of the gas filler neck ⇒ Fig. 120 1.
Screw the required adapter ⇒ Fig. 120 2 on the gas filler neck
1.
Refuel as indicated in the instructions on the pump.
Unscrew the adapter ⇒ Fig. 120 2.
Screw on the cap of the gas filler neck ⇒ Fig. 120 1.
Close the tank flap.
When the hose is removed from the tank, a small amount of LPG may spill
out ⇒  .
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
192 Checking and refilling levels
The LPG tank ⇒ Fig. 121 in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 52.8 li-
tres. If the outside temperatures are very low, it may not be possible to com-
pletely fill the LPG tank.
Pump attachments
There are a variety of types of LPG pump, and the methods of use may vary.
Therefore, let the pump operator fill the tank when refuelling for the first
time or fill from another pump.
Noises when refuelling with LPG
When refuelling with LPG, noises may be heard. These noises are insignifi-
cant.
WARNING
Failure to refuel or handle LPG in the correct way could result in a fire,
cause an explosion or lead to injuries.
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause
severe burns and other injury.
Switch off the engine before refuelling.
Always switch off mobile phones and any other radiophony applian-
ces, as electromagnetic waves may produce sparks and cause a fire.
Do not remain in the vehicle while refuelling. If it is absolutely neces-
sary to enter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal surface before
touching the attachment again. This will prevent the generation of static
electricity and any possible fires while refuelling.
Small quantities of LPG may leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes in-
to contact with skin, there is a risk of freezing.
Do not smoke and always keep bare flames away from the tank during
refuelling. Failure to do so may lead to an explosion.
Adapter for the liquid petroleum gas (LPG) filler neck
An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of
pumps with different nozzles.
Fig. 122 General table of LPG filler neck adapters.
ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)
Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)
Bayonet adapter
EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)
The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME 1,
the Dish Coupling 2, the bayonet 3 or the EURO adapter 4.
The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As
petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your
LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before
travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.
1
2
3
4
193Checking and refilling levels
Note
The four most common types of adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter 1,
the Dish Coupling adapter 2, the bayonet adapter 3 and the EURO adapt-
er 4. On the whole, we recommend you carry all four adapters in your vehi-
cle, as some countries use more than one type of filling system. The intro-
duction of a single system (Euronozzle) throughout Europe is being studied.
LPG fuel
LPG is an alternative vehicle fuel and is a blend of propane and butane.
The success of LPG is due to the strict regulations concerning exhaust gas
emissions. Compared to other fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its re-
duced emissions.
LPG quality and consumption
Quality requirements for LPG are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and
permit the use of LPG throughout Europe.
A difference is drawn between winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a
higher proportion of propane gas. As a result, the driving range of winter
gas may be lower (due to increased consumption) than that of summer gas.
LPG supplier network
The number of LPG pumps is constantly increasing.
Lists of existing LPG pumps may be found on Internet.
LPG safety
A series of collision tests performed on this vehicle while running with LPG
have confirmed its high level of safety.
The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The follow-
ing safety measures have been adopted:
The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the
engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.
A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine
compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.
A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas
from entering the vehicle interior.
All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the
maximum possible levels of safety.
The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee
safe driving conditions ⇒  . These checks are included in the Maintenance
Programme.
WARNING
If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi-
ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle.
Do not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and
have the fault repaired.
Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle
any objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off
immediately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.
LPG tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The
owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed cor-
rectly.
When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage),
make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechani-
cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note
For any fault in the LPG system, please refer to the SEAT web page, which
lists the workshops authorised to repair these faults.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
194 Checking and refilling levels
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for
vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Standard”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Research Octane Number”, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one rec-
ommended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power.
CAUTION
Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the
engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi-
tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system
clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems oc-
cur, the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European Standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indi-
cates the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on refuelling ⇒ page 189.
Biodiesel*
CAUTION
Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir-
cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by
the diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628
is authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
The diesel engine has been designed to be used exclusively with diesel
fuel conforming to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene,
fuel oil or any other type of fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with
the wrong type of fuel, do not start the engine. Seek assistance from speci-
alised personnel. The composition of these fuels may severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
195Checking and refilling levels
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, difficulties may be experienced at
temperatures below 0 °C because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.
Therefore, “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22 °C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with the Technical Services
or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel fuels
available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well
equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains
operational to approx. -24 °C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is
safe to -15 °C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not
start at temperatures of under -24 °C, simply place the vehicle in a warm
place for a while.
CAUTION
Do not mix fuel additives (thinners or similar products) with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 197.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know ex-
actly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work car-
ried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs
and batteries, are under constant development. SEAT provides a constant
flow of information to the Technical Services concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables re-
placed by a Technical Service. Please observe the relevant instructions
⇒ page 185. The engine compartment of the vehicle is a hazardous area
⇒  .
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
196 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the
risk of accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the en-
gine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Apply the handbrake and move the gear lever to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
Keep children away from the vehicle.
Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system.
This is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at
the points where the jump leads are attached ⇒ page 243. The battery
could explode.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the en-
gine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning
cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.
If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
WARNING (Continued)
If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with
the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk
from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan,
etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe
the following points:
Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trap-
ped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary
precautions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is ap-
plied. Danger of death.
If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical com-
ponents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the
above warnings:
Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network. The ve-
hicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be
triggered.
Do not smoke.
Never work near naked flames.
Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
CAUTION
When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the
wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!
197Checking and refilling levels
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Fig. 123 Bonnet opening
lever
Fig. 124 Bonnet support
rod
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are
in rest position.
To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dash panel
⇒ Fig. 123 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action ⇒  .
Lift the bonnet using the release lever (arrow) and open the
bonnet.
Release the bonnet stay and secure it in fixture designed for
this in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
198 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING (Continued)
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bon-
net, then carefully open the bonnet.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 195.
Closing the bonnet
Slightly raise the bonnet
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more
and let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving
and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly.
Risk of accident.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year
round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of
the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use on-
ly those oils that comply with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should ap-
pear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the
specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the
oil can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance Pro-
gramme, be performed by a Technical Service or a specialised workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in ⇒ page 199, Oil
properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on
time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the “Maintenance Programme”
booklet is QG1, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service pro-
grammed. If it has the codes QG0 or QG2 the interval service is dependent
on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the
characteristics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the
oil change service (LongLife service intervals).
199Checking and refilling levels
Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only
be used observing the following indications:
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service intervals.
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 200 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up
(once) with oil for fixed service intervals ⇒ page 199 (up to a maximum of
0.5 litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife service interval” or it has been
disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which al-
so appear in ⇒ page 199, Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must be
serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15 000 km (10 000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ⇒ Booklet Maintenance Programme.
In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 200 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you
can put in a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or
ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5
l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The “Maintenance Programme” states whether your vehicle is fitted with a
diesel particulate filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in die-
sel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will
cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 200 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you
can use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up
to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible service
interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service in-
terval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Partic-
ulate filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW 507 00
Diesel. Particulate Filter En-
gines (DPF).
With or without flexible service
interval (with and without
Longlife)a)
VW 507 00
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle.
This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if nee-
ded.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
200 Checking and refilling levels
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Fig. 125 Engine oil dip-
stick
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating tempera-
ture is reached and then stop.
Wait two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ⇒ Fig. 125.
Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area A
Do not add oil ⇒  .
Oil level in area B
You can add oil, but keep the level in this zone.
Oil level in area C
Oil must be added. Afterwards, the oil level should be in the lined area
B.
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is
used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely
to be higher for the first 5000 km (3000 miles). For this reason the engine
oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the
tank and before a journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must
be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 195.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a Technical Serv-
ice.
201Checking and refilling levels
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of engine oil.
Fig. 126 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒  in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 195.
Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening ⇒ Fig. 126.
Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil level is in area B, carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration ⇒ page 253.
Engine oil specification ⇒ page 199.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area A. Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the ex-
haust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Serv-
ice.
The oil change intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
202 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge
required!
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 195, Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment.
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by
splashes of oil.
When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm
horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and spe-
cialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil and
filter changed by a Technical Service.
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large
enough to hold all the engine oil.
Coolant
Engine coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially trea-
ted mixture of water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 (TL-VW 774 J).
The engine coolant additive is recognisable by its purple colour. This mix-
ture of water and additive gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25 °C (-13 °F) and protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system
against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boil-
ing point of the coolant.
To protect the engine cooling system, the percentage of additive must al-
ways be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is
not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
additive can be increased. However, the percentage of additive should not
exceed 60 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de-
crease the cooling capacity.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and, at
least, 40 % of the G 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are
purple) to obtain an optimum anticorrosion protection ⇒  . The mixture of
G 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11 (green-blue) engine
coolants will significantly reduce the anticorrosion protection and should,
therefore be avoided ⇒  .
203Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may
fail leading to serious damage.
Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with re-
spect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which
the vehicle is to be used.
When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze
and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would
not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not
approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to
the engine and the engine cooling system.
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example,
brown, this indicates that the G 13 additive has been mixed with an inade-
quate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is
the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are
spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to
the environment.
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free function-
ing of the engine cooling system.
Fig. 127 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒  in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 195.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the coolant expansion
tank with a thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap ⇒  .
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
204 Checking and refilling levels
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant liquid.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the correspond-
ing engine compartment illustration ⇒ page 253.
Ensure the coolant conforms to the required specifications. Do not use a dif-
ferent type of additive if additive G 12++ is not available. In this case use
only water and bring the coolant concentration back up to the correct level
as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be
forced out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The additive G 12++ can be mixed with the G 12+ in any proportion.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must
be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 195.
When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised!
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine
is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
CAUTION
If you notice a change in the colour of the liquid because it has been in
use for a long time, it is recommended to change it, as it will have lost some
of its properties and could cause damage to the vehicle.
If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down
before putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large cool-
ant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a special-
ised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Other-
wise, there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
Fig. 128 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.
205Checking and refilling levels
The windscreen washer and the headlight washers are supplied with fluid
from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment. The
container holds approx. 2 litres; in vehicles with headlight washers* it holds
approx. 4.5 litres.
The tank is in the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We rec-
ommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Ap-
proved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must
be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 195.
CAUTION
Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per in-
structions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes in
the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 129 Windscreen
wipers in service position
Fig. 130 Change wind-
screen wiper blade
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
206 Checking and refilling levels
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of
the wipers to the service position.
Do not change the windscreen wipers when out of the service posi-
tion, as it could cause paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction
with the windscreen wiper arm.
Service position (For changing wiper blades)
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 9 sec.) move
the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent wipe position.
The windscreen wipers will move to the service position
⇒ Fig. 129.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the windscreen wiper arm.
Press on the securing tab ⇒ Fig. 130.
Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it
clicks into place.
Place the windscreen wiper arms to their initial position.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are dam-
aged, or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special-
ised workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
CAUTION
Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually.
This could cause damage.
To avoid damage to the bonnet and the windscreen wiper arms, the lat-
ter should only be lifted off the windscreen when in service position.
Note
The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only
when the bonnet is properly closed.
You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a
cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.
207Checking and refilling levels
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 131 Removing the
rear window wiper blade
Fig. 132 Fitting the rear
window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ⇒ Fig. 131.
Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove
the blade ⇒ Fig. 131.
Fitting the wiper blade
With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
Place the blade as shown in the ⇒ Fig. 132 and slide the adapt-
er along until it engages.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or
cleaned if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
CAUTION
A damaged or dirty window wiper could scratch the rear window.
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the window.
Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
208 Checking and refilling levels
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the serv-
ice schedule.
Fig. 133 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding en-
gine compartment illustration ⇒ page 253. The brake fluid reservoir has a
black and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below
the “MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the
instrument panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 63.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and ob-
serve the warnings ⇒ page 195.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Programme indicates the brake fluid
change intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Serv-
ice.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ⇒  in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 195 in
section “Safety notes for working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of
the brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock
which could impair the braking effect.
Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that ex-
pressly meets VW 501 14 standards.
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or SEAT
Official Service. If none is available, use only high quality brake fluid that
meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT
4.
Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may
affect operation of the brake system and reduce its effectiveness. Never use
a brake fluid if the container does not state that it complies with VW 501 14,
DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
209Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and ob-
serve the warnings ⇒ page 195.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Pro-
gramme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake
fluid is left in the brake system for too long. This would seriously affect
the effectiveness of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may
cause an accident.
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from
the paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
The brake pads and brake fluid must be collected and disposed of accord-
ing the applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the
necessary equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing
of this waste material.
Vehicle battery
Warnings on handling the battery
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and
eye protection!
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery
is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as
the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid
and particles containing lead.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye
protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
210 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING (Continued)
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When han-
dling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electro-
static charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the en-
gine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only
switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never re-
verse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 °C.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace
a damaged battery immediately.
For vehicles with the battery in the luggage compartment: Check that
the battery gas ventilation hose is securely attached.
CAUTION
Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en-
gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com-
ponents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time,
as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
Open the engine bonnet and the battery cover ⇒  in Safety in-
structions on working in the engine compartment on page 196
⇒  in Warnings on handling the battery on page 209. For vehi-
cles with the battery under the spare wheel, open the rear lid
and lift the floor covering. The battery is located next to the
spare wheel.
Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently
until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram ⇒ page 253. The location of the battery in the luggage com-
partment can be seen in ⇒ Fig. 174.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.
211Checking and refilling levels
There are two different colours:
Black: correct charge status.
Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a speci-
alised workshop.
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long peri-
ods, the battery should be checked by a specialised workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle,
the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have
the vehicle battery checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charg-
ed or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and
has special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety
specifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This
standard applies as of August 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings ⇒  in Warnings on handling the battery on page 209.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordi-
nary household waste.
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and at a right angle.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the
same direction of rotation when they are installed again.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
212 Checking and refilling levels
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres must be run in ⇒ page 168.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of
tyre and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of
the tyres is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by a Techni-
cal Service.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
New tyres do not have maximum grip during the first 500 km (300
miles). Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.
Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side
when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for dam-
age.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the fuel tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be re-
duced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pres-
sure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting
a journey.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
213Checking and refilling levels
Tyre useful life
The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Fig. 134 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 135 Diagram for
changing wheels
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
⇒ Fig. 134, running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be
6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall
(for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the positions of
the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is
1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators).
Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries
⇒  .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-
out. For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per
month ⇒ page 212.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisa-
ble to change them around as shown ⇒ Fig. 135. The useful life of all the
tyres will then be about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which re-
sults in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause exces-
sive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be reba-
lanced when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety
of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel
alignment checked by a Technical Service.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
214 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indica-
tors are worn ⇒ page 213. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a
greater risk of aquaplaning.
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear
checked by a Technical Service.
Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteris-
tics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and
safe handling ⇒  .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Tyre construction: Radial
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating code
Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
A direction of rotation symbol
“Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT... 1103...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by a Technical
Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary spe-
cial tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the
old tyres.
Any Technical Service has full information on the technical requirements
when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
195
65
R
15
91
T
215Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to
the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system to over-
heat.
All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country con-
cerned.
Note
For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
If the spare wheel is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short peri-
od of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as
possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped
bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and
that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different
vehicle, even if it is the same model ⇒ page 185.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or
oil to them.
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos-
en whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels
is 120 Nm.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
216 Checking and refilling levels
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicle's han-
dling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern)
gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pres-
sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker on fuel tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's reg-
istration documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in
the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 214, New tyres and wheels determines the
following speed limits for winter tyres: ⇒ 
max. 160 km/h (100 mph)
max. 180 km/h (110 mph)
max. 190 km/h (120 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Technical Service. The legal requirements of
each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
Q
S
T
H
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 214, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Other-
wise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not
wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for the follow-
ing tyres:
175/70R14
185/60R15
Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm (including the chain
closure)
215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm (including the chain
closure)
215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm (including the chain
closure)
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For
safety reasons cover caps, available in any Technical Service, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact
with the wheel housing.
217Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they
will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
Note
In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h
(30 mph). The legal requirements of the country should be followed.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
218 If and when
If and when
Vehicle tools, spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle tools are located under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
Lift luggage compartment floor panel.
Take the vehicle tools out of the vehicle.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
Jack*
Hook to remove integral* trim and screw caps.
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Towline anchorage*
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are
optional extras.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on
this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or
other loads. Risk of injury.
Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.
WARNING (Continued)
Never start the engine when the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of acci-
dent.
If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be se-
cured by suitable means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)*
The spare wheel (temporary spare wheel) must only be used
for the minimum necessary time.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the temporary spare wheel
If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of pressure, the temporary spare
wheel is only intended for temporary use until you reach a workshop.
Change it for a duty wheel as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare
wheel. This temporary spare wheel has been specially designed for your ve-
hicle, thus, it cannot be changed with the temporary spare wheel from an-
other vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tem-
porary spare wheel.
219If and when
If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains,
fit the compact temporary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels.
You can then attach the snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear and
use this wheel to replace the punctured front wheel.
WARNING
The tyre pressures must be checked and corrected as soon as possi-
ble after fitting the temporary spare wheel.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Higher speeds can cause
an accident.
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of ac-
cident.
Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time,
risk of accident.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on
the compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for vehicles not including a temporary
spare wheel) is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment.
In the event of a punctured tyre, your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre Mo-
bility System (tyre repair kit).
The tyre repair kit consists of a container with sealing product to repair the
puncture and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure. The kit
will reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the pene-
tration of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note
Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possi-
ble with the sealing product.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
All vehicle occupants should leave the vehicle. They should
wait in a safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barri-
er).
Switch the engine off. Switch the hazard warning lights on and
place the warning triangles in position.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
220 If and when
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangles in
position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
CAUTION
If you have to change the wheel on a slope, it is essential to lock the parallel
wheel on the same axle as that to be changed, with a wedge or similar in
order to immobilise the vehicle.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
Remove the hub caps or the integral trim.
Slacken the wheel bolts.
Raise the vehicle with the jack at the corresponding point.
Remove the wheel and then fit the spare wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the box spanner.
Replace the hub cap.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as pos-
sible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon
as possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must
be 120 Nm.
Note
If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque checked.
For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque has been checked.
221If and when
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Fig. 136 Remove the
complete hub cap
Removing
Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook ⇒ Fig. 136.
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Next
fit the rest of the hubcap
Loosening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Fig. 137 Changing a
wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to
the left ⇒ Fig. 137.
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft
wheel bolts.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
222 If and when
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle
with the jack, otherwise there is a risk of accident.
Note
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised
with a jack.
Fig. 138 Jack position
points
Fig. 139 Fitting the jack
Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel
to be changed ⇒ Fig. 138.
Place the jack under the jacking point and turn the crank until
the arm of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the
door sill.
Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib un-
der the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat
on the ground ⇒ Fig. 139.
Raise the jack until the defective wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
⇒ Fig. 138. There is only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the
jack. Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good sup-
port. Use a large and stable base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface
(such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
223If and when
WARNING
Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure
to do so could result in an accident.
The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must
be completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them
on a clean surface.
Fitting a wheel
Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely
with a box spanner.
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These sur-
faces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts. This is found in the tool box.
Fig. 140 Anti-theft
wheel bolt
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go ⇒ Fig. 140.
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part
of the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from the
SEAT Official Services.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
224 If and when
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that
they rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the spare wheel so it rotates in the
wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give
optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit* (Tyre Mobility-System)
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing product and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing product are located on the sealing product con-
tainer.
It also contains the instructions for using the compressor.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing product if the
tyre has been damaged by driving the vehicle after the tyre has lost its
air.
Always observe warnings and follow safety instructions concerning
compressor and sealing compound carefully.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph), avoid heavy acceleration,
hard braking and fast cornering.
Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit-
able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive care-
fully to the next available specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
If you have to dispose of a sealant can, go to a specialised waste service or
to a SEAT Technical Service, where the product can be recycled in an appro-
priate waste container.
Note
If sealing product should leak out, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it
off like a piece of foil.
Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a specialised workshop.
Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possi-
ble with the sealing product.
225If and when
What to do first
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
All occupants should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility Sys-
tem “General information and safety notes.”
Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangles in
position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
CAUTION
Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Remember to replace the sealing product as soon as possible.
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing product
The instructions on the container give detailed information on
how to use the sealing product.
Inflating the tyre.
Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power socket.
Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the
pressure gauge.
Completing the repair
Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
Fit the valve cap.
Unplug the compressor from the socket.
Return all tools to their proper storing location.
Note
The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6 minutes.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
226 If and when
Fuses
Changing a fuse
Blown fuses must be replaced
Fig. 141 Fuses in the
dash panel
Fuse cover
Switch off the ignition and its failed electrical component.
Identify the fuse corresponding to the damaged electric con-
sumer ⇒ page 227.
Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are loca-
ted behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel. When the steer-
ing wheel is on the right, the fuses are on the right-hand side of the dash
panel, behind a cover.
Fuses colour code
Colour Amps
Grey 2
Beige 5
Brown 7,5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
Natural (White) 25
Green 30
Orange 40
WARNING
Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a
higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause
damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note
If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical sys-
tem must be checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
SEAT Official Services.
227If and when
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Power steering/Engine operation/Flow meter 7,5
2
Diagnostics/Heater/Autoclimate/Climatronic/
Electric anti-dazzle mirror/Navigator/Air condi-
tioning pressure switch/ Climate fan/AFS Control
unit/Coming home relay/Soundaktor/CCS
10
3
Petrol engine control unit/Diesel engine control
unit/Relay coils/Engine operation/Bi-turbo fuel
control unit
5
4ABS-ESC Control unit/RKA Switch/Gateway con-
trol unit/ESC Relay/Rotation sensor 10
5 Reverse light/Heating nozzles 10
6 Instrument panel 5
7 Retro fog light/Start-Stop relays 7,5
8Paddle levers on steering wheel for automatic
gearbox 2
9 Headlight lever/Windscreen wiper switch 10
10 BCM Electronic control unit power supply 5
11 Airbag control unit 5
12 Automatic gearbox/ LPG system 10
13 Exterior mirror control 5
14 Left-hand AFS headlights 15
15 Right-hand AFS headlights 15
16 Vacant
17 Number plate light 5
18 Clean pump 7,5
19 Electronic control unit 5
20 Turn signals/Brake lights 15
Number Consumer Amps
21 Lights control, instrument panel 5
22 Heated mirrors 5
23 Engine injection module/Rain sensor/Automatic
gearbox lever/Main petrol relay 7,5
24 Luggage compartment light, interior light, glove
compartment light, side lights 10
25 Parking aid 5
26 Towing hook
27 Headlight control 5
28 Lambda probe 10
29 Vacuum pump/LPG power supply/High-pressure
pump 15, 20, 20a)
30 Engine solenoid coils/Additional heating relay/
Pressure sensor/AKF Valve 10A
31
Petrol engine operation/Glow plugs/Relay coil/
Electric fan/Secondary water pump relay/Flow-
meter
10
32 Engine control unit 15, 20,
30b)
33 Clutch switch sensor/Additional heating relay
coil/ Servo sensor 5
34 Fuel control unit / Vacuum pump 15
35 Vacant
36 Main beam with/without AFS 10, 15c)
37 Kombi/Coming Home relay/Main beam head-
lights relay 10
38 Engine heater 30
39 Vacant
40 12 Volt Input/Cigarette lighter 15
41 Heated seats control unit / Cup Holder 25
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
228 If and when
Number Consumer Amps
42 Horn 20
43 Panoramic roof 30
44 Windscreen wipers 20
45 Heated rear window 30
46 Radio/Bluetooth/USB + AUX-In/DC-DC converter
for Start-Stop 20
47 Climatronic/autoclima/Diagnosis/Automatic
gearbox (ZSS lock) 5
48 Locking unit 25
49 Front left window raiser 25
50 Rear electric windows 30
51 Right front window raiser 25
52 Alarm 15
53 Electro-kinetic pump relay/bi-turbo fuel control
unit 15
54 Reverse lightd) / Fog light/ Cornering light 15
55 Transformer on 15, 20b)
56 Rear window wiper 10
57 Left daytime running light/ Turn signals/ Right
dipped beam/ Number plate lightc) 15
58 Right daytime running light/ Rear fog light/ Left
dipped beam/ Main bean relay/ X Relayc) 15
a) If it is LPG.
b) Ampere rating according to motorisation.
c) If Start-Stop is installed, lights and/or AFS are automatically switched on.
d) Only with automatic transmission and/or Start-Stop, automatic light-on and/or AFS.
Fuses below steering wheel in relay holder
PTC fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Supplementary electrical heating using air 40
2 Supplementary electrical heating using air 40
3 Supplementary electrical heating using air 40
AUX 1 Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Navigator, Bluetooth, MDI, radio control lever 20
2 Instrument panel/ESC Relay 5
AUX 2 Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Headlight washer pump 20
AUX 3 Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Trailer control unit 15
2 Trailer control unit 20
3 Trailer control unit 20
229If and when
Fuses in engine compartment above battery
Fig. 142 Fuses in engine
compartment
Non-metal fuses
Number Consumer Amps
S1 ABS ESC control unit 25
S2 Electroblower climate heater/fan 30
S3 Automatic gearbox control unit 30
S4 Vacant
S5 Electronic control unit 5
S6 Injection module 30
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list contains all data at the time of going to
press, so it is subject to modifications.
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the failed component.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands. The finger-
prints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the
bulb, causing a reduction in bulb life and condensation on the mirror sur-
face, thus reducing effectiveness.
A bulb must only be replaced by one of the same type. The type is indicated
on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
Below, the light source used for all functions is broken down.
Double headlights
- H7 Long Life
- H7
- W5W Long Life
- PY 21W
Single headlight
- H4 Long Life
- W5W Long Life
- PY 21W
Dipped beam
Main beam
Side
Turn signal
Dipped/Main
Side
Turn signal
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
230 If and when
Xenon1) //adaptive headlights*
- D1S2)
- LED3)
- LED3)
- PY 21W
Fog light
- H11
WARNING
Take particular care when working on components in the engine com-
partment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you
touch the bulb, causing injury.
The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must
be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp
parts in the headlight housing.
CAUTION
Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Other-
wise, a short circuit could occur.
Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.
Dipped and full beam
Side
DRL (day light)
Turn signals
Fog light/cornering
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the prop-
er manner.
Note
Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This
has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly
be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the inter-
est of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.
Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth
or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will va-
porise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited
on the reflector and will impair its surface.
1) With this type of headlight, the user can replace the turn signal bulb. Replacement of the
dipped/main beam bulb must be done by a Technical Service, given that complex elements
must be removed from the vehicle and the automatic control system that incorporates it
must be reset.
2) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5 times
more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circumstances,
there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
3) In the event that there is a fault in the LEDs, the complete headlight must be replaced.
231If and when
Single headlight bulb change
Single headlight bulb
Fig. 143 Single head-
light
Side lights - Dipped beam/main beam.
Turn signal.
A
B
Turn signal bulb
Fig. 144 Single turn sig-
nal lamp
Raise the bonnet.
Turn bulb holder ⇒ Fig. 144 A to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation involves the above steps in reverse sequence.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
232 If and when
Dipped/main beam headlights
Fig. 145 Dipped beam/
main beam, single head-
light
Fig. 146 Dipped beam/
main beam, single head-
light
Raise the bonnet.
Move the loop ⇒ Fig. 145 1 in the direction of the arrow and
remove the cover.
Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 146 2 from the bulb.
Unclip the retainer spring ⇒ Fig. 146 3 pressing inwards to the
right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Fit the connector.
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits
well on the casing cover during the operation.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Side light
Fig. 147 Side lights
Raise the bonnet.
233If and when
Move the loop ⇒ Fig. 145 1 in the direction of the arrow and
remove the cover.
Remove the bulb holder 4 ⇒ Fig. 147 outwards.
Replace the bulb by pulling it out and inserting the replace-
ment.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Double headlight bulb change
Double headlight
Fig. 148 Double head-
lights
Side lights
Main beam headlights
A
B
Dipped beam headlights
Turn signal lights
Side light
Fig. 149 Side lights
Fig. 150 Side lights
C
D
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
234 If and when
Raise the bonnet.
Move the loop 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the
cover ⇒ Fig. 149.
Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 150 2 by pulling outward.
Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fitting the new one.
Installation involves the above steps in reverse sequence.
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits
well on the casing cover during the operation.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Main beam headlights
Fig. 151 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 152 Main beam
headlights
Raise the bonnet.
Move the loop 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the
cover ⇒ Fig. 151.
Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 152 2 by pulling outward.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly
into the cut-out on the reflector.
Installation involves the above steps in reverse sequence.
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits
well on the casing cover during the operation.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
235If and when
Dipped beam headlights
Fig. 153 Dipped beam
headlights
Fig. 154 Dipped beam
headlights
Raise the bonnet.
Move the loop ⇒ Fig. 153 1 in the direction of the arrow and
remove the cover.
Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 154 2 from the bulb.
Unclip the retainer spring ⇒ Fig. 154 3 pressing inwards to the
right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Fit the connector.
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure that the gasket sits
well on the casing cover during the operation.
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Turn signal lights
Fig. 155 Turn signal
Raise the bonnet.
Turn bulb holder ⇒ Fig. 155 A to the left and pull.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
236 If and when
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation involves the above steps in reverse sequence.
237If and when
Changing the bulbs of AFS headlights
AFS headlight bulbs
Fig. 156 AFS headlight
bulbs
Turn signal lights
Xenon headlight (dipped beam/main beam)
Changing the xenon bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
This type of bulb should be changed at a specialised workshop.
A
B
Turn signal light bulb
Fig. 157 Turn signal
Raise the bonnet.
Turn bulb holder ⇒ Fig. 157 A to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation involves the above steps in reverse sequence.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
238 If and when
Changing the fog light bulbs
Fog light bulb
Fig. 158 Fog light
Fig. 159 Fog light
Remove the bolt ⇒ Fig. 158 A from the fog light grille with a
screwdriver.
Subsequently, remove the clips located on the edge of the grill
with gentle leverage.
Remove the bolts (3x) ⇒ Fig. 159 B to remove the fog light.
Remove the metal clip situated on the upper part of the fog
light pulling towards the exterior of the vehicle ⇒ Fig. 159 C.
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 160 Fog light
Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 160 A from the bulb.
Turn bulb holder ⇒ Fig. 160 B to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it
anticlockwise at the same time.
239If and when
Installation involves the above steps in reverse sequence.
Check that the bulb works properly.
Changing the rear, side and interior light
bulbs
Summary of LED tail lights
LEDS
Brake lights
Side lights
Bulbs
Rear fog light
Reversing light
Turn signal
Access to tail lights
Fig. 161 Access to tail
lights
Open the rear lid.
Turn the bolt in the direction of the arrow, by hand or with a
screwdriver ⇒ Fig. 161.
Remove the tail light, by pulling it outwards.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
240 If and when
Changing bulbs on tail lights
Fig. 162 Changing bulbs
on tail lights
Fig. 163 Changing bulbs
on tail lights
Remove the connector from housing A ⇒ Fig. 161.
Remove the bulb holder, separating it from the casing. To do
this, press tabs B in the direction of the arrows ⇒ Fig. 162.
When the bulb holder has been removed, press in the direction
of the arrow 1 and at the same time, turn in the direction of
the arrow 2 ⇒ Fig. 163
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
Carry out the same operations as in lights fitted with bulbs.
If necessary, remove the socket, as if it were a bulb.
If the brake light and/or side light with LEDs have to be replaced, the tail
light must be replaced.
Side turn signal bulbs
Fig. 164 Side turn sig-
nals
Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the
bulb.
Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.
241If and when
Remove the failed bulb and replace with a new bulb.
Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into
place.
First fit the turn signal in the opening in the chassis, fastening
the tabs 1 ⇒ Fig. 164, and then fit in the bulb as shown by the
arrow 2 ⇒ Fig. 164.
Number plate light
Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the special slot and re-
move the bulb.
Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until it is free.
Change the bulb.
Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until it fits fully.
Fit the light into the space and press until you hear a “click”.
Interior light and front reading light
Fig. 165 Front reading
light
To remove the glass
Insert a fine screwdriver between the casing and the glass
⇒ Fig. 165.
Carefully remove the glass, levering it to avoid possible dam-
age.
To replace the bulbs
Pull the bulbs outwards.
To remove the central bulb, hold and press to one side.
Assembly
Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gently on the outer edge
of the side light.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
242 If and when
First fit the glass with the fastening tabs over the frame of the
switch. Next press the front part until the two long tabs click on
the support.
Additional brake light*
Given the difficulty involved in the replacement of this light it should be
done by the Technical Service.
Luggage compartment light*
Fig. 166 Luggage com-
partment light
Fig. 167 Luggage com-
partment light
Extract the tulip shaped fitting by pressing on the inside edge
of this -arrow- using the flat side of a screwdriver ⇒ Fig. 166.
Press the bulb sideways and remove it from its housing
⇒ Fig. 167.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can
be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
243If and when
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufactur-
er's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow
as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board net-
work.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 168 Diagram of con-
nections for vehicles
without Start-Stop sys-
tem
Fig. 169 Diagram of con-
nections for vehicles
with Start-Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ⇒  .
2. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + termi-
nal of the vehicle with the flat battery A ⇒ Fig. 168.
Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter-
minal + in the vehicle providing assistance B.
Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
of the vehicle providing assistance B ⇒ Fig. 168.
Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid met-
al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to
a point as far as possible from the battery A.
3. For vehicles with Start-Stop system:
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
244 If and when
Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + termi-
nal of the vehicle with the flat battery A ⇒ Fig. 169.
Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter-
minal + in the vehicle providing assistance B.
Connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground
terminal, a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the en-
gine block ⇒ Fig. 169.
Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid met-
al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to
a point as far as possible from the battery A.
4. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait two
or three minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
7. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam
headlights (if they are switched on).
8. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehi-
cle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks
which are generated when the leads are disconnected.
9. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse or-
der to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 195, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the
flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, dan-
ger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to
the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery
could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
245If and when
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
246 If and when
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting*
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-start-
ing is preferable ⇒ page 242.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch the ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the
gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the
towing vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the following points if you use a tow rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
Drive slowly at first until the tow rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake sooner than nor-
mal and pressing the pedal gently.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow bar. You should only use a
tow rope if you do not have a tow bar.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towline anchorages provided
or a towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexper-
ienced drivers should not attempt to tow.
247If and when
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking
the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of
overloading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must ap-
ply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running,
you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position “N”.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph).
Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles).
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gear-
box, you must raise the driven wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km (30 miles), the front
wheels should be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by
a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power.
The vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should
be carried out by a qualified person.
The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle.
Towline anchorages
Fig. 170 Fitting the tow-
line anchorage to front of
the vehicle
Fitting the towline anchorage
Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.
Remove the front cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.
For FR finishes, press down and pull outwards.
Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 170.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
248 If and when
Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 171 Rear towline
anchorage
There is a towline anchorage at the rear on the right below the rear bumper.
249Description of specifications
Technical Specifications
Description of specifications
Important information
Important
The information in your vehicle's official documents always
take precedence over the information in the current instruc-
tion manual.
All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the
standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Mainte-
nance Programme or the vehicle registration documentation shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit-
ted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used to denote en-
gine power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
CO2Carbon dioxide
Abbreviation Meaning
CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion pow-
er.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resist-
ance of petrol.
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
250 Description of specifications
Vehicle identification data
The most important information is given on the identifica-
tion plate and the vehicle data sticker.
Fig. 172 Vehicle data
sticker (luggage compart-
ment)
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the right rib inside the engine com-
partment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from out-
side the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the
left-hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also
located on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the lug-
gage compartment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: ⇒ Fig. 172
Production control number
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Model code number
Model designation/engine power output
Engine and gearbox code letters
Paintwork number/interior trim code
Optional equipment codes
Consumption values
CO2 emissions values
At the end of the data sticker, in points 8 and 9, you can see the consump-
tion and emission information.
Information on consumption and emissions
Urban consumption (l/100 km)
Urban CO2 emissions (g/km)
Extra-urban consumption (l/100 km)
Extra-urban CO2 emissions (g/km)
Combined consumption (l/100 km)
Combined CO2 emissions (g/km)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
251Description of specifications
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The vehicle fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be consulted on the
vehicle data sticker in the spare wheel well, inside the luggage compart-
ment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The fuel consumption and CO2 emission values refer to the weight category
assigned to your vehicle according to the engine and gearbox combination,
as well as the specific equipment fitted, and is only used to compare be-
tween the different models.
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions do not depend only on the per-
formance of the vehicle, they can also differ from the established values de-
pending on other factors such as driving style, road conditions, traffic con-
ditions, environmental conditions, load and number of passengers.
Calculation of fuel consumption
The consumption values have been calculated based on measurements per-
formed or supervised by certified CE laboratories according to the latest ver-
sion of directives 715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more information
consult the European Union Publications Office at EUR-Lex: © European Un-
ion, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and are valid for the kerb
weight indicated for the vehicle.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption
values can differ from those calculated in the current European regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for
the weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒  .
WARNING
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident.
Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and re-
quirements.
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded,
the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to acci-
dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive tri-
als according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in
certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (60 mph)). The figures may be differ-
ent in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes
precedence over these data at all times ⇒  .
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
252 Description of specifications
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket
must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approach-
ing the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will
be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a
wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h (50 mph) limit. This is
also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the
permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The
slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced. ⇒ 
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for the follow-
ing tyres:
175/70R14
185/60R15
Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm (including the chain
closure)
215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm (including the chain
closure)
215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm (including the chain
closure)
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒  .
The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos-
en while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about
appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
253Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the ve-
hicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, other-
wise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Fig. 173 Diagram for the
location of the various el-
ements
Fig. 174 For vehicles
with the battery in the
luggage compartment.
Coolant expansion tank
Engine oil level dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery
Windscreen washer fluid container
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the compo-
nents mentioned above. These operations are described in the ⇒ page 195.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech-
nical specifications as of ⇒ page 249.
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
254 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 44 kW (60 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 44 (60)/ 5200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 108/ 3000
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 3/ 1198
Fuel Super 95 RONa) /Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 155
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 10,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 15,9
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1540
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1049
Gross front axle weight in kg 810
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 520
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1000
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 800
255Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 51 kW (70 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 51 (70)/ 5400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 112/ 3000
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 3/ 1198
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 163
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 13,9
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1540
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1049
Gross front axle weight in kg 810
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 520
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1000
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 800
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
256 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 63 kW (85 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 63 (85) / 4800
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 160 / 1500-3500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1197
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 180(5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 7,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 11,3
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1580
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1090
Gross front axle weight in kg 860
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 540
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1000
257Technical specifications
Petrol engine/LPG 1.6 60 kW (81 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 60 (81)/ 4000-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 145/ 3800
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1598
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)/LPG
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 174
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 7,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 12,2
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1610
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1143
Gross front axle weight in kg 840
Gross rear axle weight in kg 800
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 570
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
258 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1390
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 177
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 7,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 11,8
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1560
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1075
Gross front axle weight in kg 840
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 530
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
259Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 175/1550-4100
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1197
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) With a slight power loss
Performance
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 190 190
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 6,5 6,5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 9,8 9,7
Weights
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1580 1600
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1090 1115
Gross front axle weight in kg 860 890
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Trailer weight
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 540 550
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200 1200
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
260 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS) Start-Stop
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 175/1550-4100
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1197
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 190
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 6,5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 9,8
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1580
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1095
Gross front axle weight in kg 860
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 540
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
261Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 153/ 3800
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1598
Fuel Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.
Performance
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 189 188
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 6,8 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 10,4 10,1
Weights
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1570 1600
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1090 1120
Gross front axle weight in kg 860 890
Gross rear axle weight in kg 780 780
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Trailer weight
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes 540 560
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000 1000
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
262 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 110 (150)/ 5800
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 220/ 1250-4500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1390
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)
a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b) Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 212
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 5,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 7,6
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1680
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1254
Gross front axle weight in kg 930
Gross rear axle weight in kg 800
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1300
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
263Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.2 TDI CR 55 kW (75 PS) DPF Start-Stop Ecomotive
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 55 (75)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 180/ 2000
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 3/ 1199
Fuel min. diesel compliant with DIN EN 590 51 CNa)
a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 173
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 9,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 13,9
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1610
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1150
Gross front axle weight in kg 900
Gross rear axle weight in kg 780
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 570
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
264 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.2 TDI CR 55 kW (75 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 55 (75)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 180/ 2000
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 3/ 1199
Fuel min. diesel compliant with DIN EN 590 51 CNa)
a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 168
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 9,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 13,9
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1630
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1135
Gross front axle weight in kg 900
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 560
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
265Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 66 (90)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 230/ 1500-2500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1598
Fuel min. diesel compliant with DIN EN 590 51 CNa)
a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 178
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 7,8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 11,8
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1670
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1170
Gross front axle weight in kg 930
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 580
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
266 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/without DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 4400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-2500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1598
Fuel min. diesel compliant with DIN EN 590 51 CNa)
a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 188
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 10,5
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1670
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1170
Gross front axle weight in kg 930
Gross rear axle weight in kg 770
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes 580
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
267Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 105 (143)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4/ 1968
Fuel min. diesel compliant with DIN EN 590 51 CNa)
a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h (mph) 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (0-50 mph) in sec. 5,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (0-60 mph) in sec. 8,2
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1676
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1245
Gross front axle weight in kg 950
Gross rear axle weight in kg 800
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes, gradients up to 12% 620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1300
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Safety First Operating Instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
268 Technical specifications
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4061 mm/1693 mm
Height at kerb weight 1445 mm
Front and rear projection 857 mm/735 mm
Wheelbase 2469 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track widtha) Front Rear
1465 mm 1457 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 45 l. Reserve 7 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 2 l/4.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Air conditioner
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Air recirculation
Semi-automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . . 133
Air recirculation mode
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
ASR (Traction control system)
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 110
Deactivating the anti-dazzle function . . . . 110
Automatic car washing tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Automatic windscreen wiper/washer . . . . . . . 107
AUX/USB input connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Auxiliary audio input connection (AUX) . . . . . 125
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 168
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Bulb change
double headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Single headlight bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bulb changes
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bulb defect
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 139
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Car phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
269Index
Central lock button
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . 82
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Locking system for involuntary unlocking . 82
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Changing bulbs
interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . 241
Changing bulbs on tail lights . . . . . . . . . 239, 240
Changing gear
see Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Changing gear in tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . 151
Changing single headlight bulbs
Turn signal bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Changing the AFS headlight bulbs
Xenon lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Changing the bulbs
AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Side turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Changing the main headlight bulb
turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Changing the main headlight bulbs
turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Changing the single headlight bulbs
Dipped/main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . 205
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 210
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Child seat
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Climatronic
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cloth seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Coming Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Compartment for on-board documentation . . 120
Control
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 203
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Coolant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Coolant temperature
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Correct adjustment of front head restraints . . . 13
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cruise control
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
270 Index
Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Deactivating front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Deactivating the airbag
Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Differential lock fault (EDL)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Double headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Double headlight bulb change
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Economically / Environmentally friendly . 171
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 175
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . 100
E
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Electro-hydraulic steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Electronic stability control
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 165
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . 195
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Engine fault
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Engine management
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Engine oil
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 165
see also Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 139
271Index
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
F
Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fog lights bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . 101
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Front ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Front interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . 40
Front reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 250
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fuel tank
see Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
G
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
General overview of the engine compartment 253
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115
Adjustment of the head restraint angle . . 115
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Heated rear window
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Hydraulic Brake Assist
Automatic hazard warning lights activa-
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Information in the multifunction display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instrument panel
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Interval wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
J
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
272 Index
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
L
Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Leaving Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Load compartment in the luggage compart-
ment
see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 16
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 143, 191
LPG system
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
see also Loading the luggage compartment . .16
Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . 106, 242
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 104
Main beam headlights
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Maintenance
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Manual heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manual heating system
Defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Demisting the windscreen and side win-
dows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
MFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Operation when a fault occurs
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Outside temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 20
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 176
273Index
R
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rear drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Rear seat
folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rear window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . 109
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Reverse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Roll-back function
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Running in
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 40
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 116
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Seat belt tensioner
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Semiautomatic air conditioning
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Single headlight bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 252
274 Index
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particu-
late filter
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Speed selector lever lock
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Start-Stop
Activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 142
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 142
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . 142
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Steering column controls
Audio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Front right seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Sun visor
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
T
Tank
Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 21
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tire Mobility System (tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 224
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 251
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Tow starting
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Traction control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Trailer turn signals
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 105
Two-way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tyre Mobility System (tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 219
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Tyre pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 224
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tyres useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . 212
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
V
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system . . . 132
Vehicle interior monitoring and tow-away pro-
tection system
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
275Index
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 176
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
W
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning messages
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Washing tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 178
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 204
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 252
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 252
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 29
Why should head restraints be correctly adjus-
ted? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 20, 29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Windscreen washer fluid
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . 207
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . 195
276 Index
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.12
6J4012003DL
Inglés 6J4012003DL (07.12) (GT9)
IBIZA
Owners manual
IBIZA Inglés (07.12)
86

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Seat Ibiza 2012 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Seat Ibiza 2012 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3.84 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Seat Ibiza 2012

Seat Ibiza 2012 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 292 pagina's

Seat Ibiza 2012 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 292 pagina's

Seat Ibiza 2012 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 294 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info